Handle volatile array types in dwarf2read.c.
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
4b95cf5c 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2014 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set I960
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
36@set Renesas
37@set SPU
38@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 39@set WIN32
e0001a05 40@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
41@end ifset
42@c man end
43
9160ea82
AM
44@ifnottex
45@dircategory Software development
46@direntry
252b5132 47* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
48@end direntry
49@end ifnottex
252b5132 50
0e9517a9 51@copying
e49e529d
JM
52This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55@end ifset
56version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 57
1db37fe6 58Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2014 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
1db37fe6 95Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2014 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 96
0285c67d 97Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 98under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
99or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 102section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 103@c man end
252b5132 104
252b5132
RH
105@end titlepage
106@end iftex
4ecceb71 107@contents
252b5132
RH
108@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
84ec0e6d 110@ifnottex
252b5132 111@node Top
71ba23f6 112@top LD
e49e529d
JM
113This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116@end ifset
117version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 118
cf055d54 119This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
120Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 122
252b5132
RH
123@menu
124* Overview:: Overview
125* Invocation:: Invocation
126* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127@ifset GENERIC
128* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129@end ifset
130@ifclear GENERIC
131@ifset H8300
132* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
134@ifset Renesas
135* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
136@end ifset
137@ifset I960
138* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
140@ifset ARM
141* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
143@ifset M68HC11
144* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
146@ifset HPPA
147* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
149@ifset M68K
150* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151@end ifset
833794fc
MR
152@ifset MIPS
153* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
155@ifset POWERPC
156* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157@end ifset
158@ifset POWERPC64
159* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
161@ifset SPU
162* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
164@ifset TICOFF
165* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
167@ifset WIN32
168* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
170@ifset XTENSA
171* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172@end ifset
252b5132
RH
173@end ifclear
174@ifclear SingleFormat
175* BFD:: BFD
176@end ifclear
177@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 181* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 182* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 183@end menu
84ec0e6d 184@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
185
186@node Overview
187@chapter Overview
188
189@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 191
0879a67a 192@ifset man
0285c67d 193@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 194ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
195@c man end
196
197@c man begin SEEALSO
198ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200@file{ld}.
201@c man end
202@end ifset
203
204@c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
ff5dcc92 206@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 207their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 208compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 209
ff5dcc92 210@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
211a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
0285c67d
NC
214@ifset man
215@c For the man only
ece2d90e 216This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
217@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
219@end ifset
220
252b5132 221@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
222This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
224write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227@end ifclear
228
229Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 232@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
233(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
0285c67d
NC
235@c man end
236
252b5132
RH
237@node Invocation
238@chapter Invocation
239
0285c67d
NC
240@c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
ff5dcc92 242The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
243and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
0285c67d
NC
246@c man end
247
252b5132
RH
248@ifset UsesEnvVars
249@menu
250* Options:: Command Line Options
251* Environment:: Environment Variables
252@end menu
253
254@node Options
255@section Command Line Options
256@end ifset
257
258@cindex command line
259@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
260
261@c man begin OPTIONS
262
252b5132
RH
263The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 266For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
267object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270@smallexample
271ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272@end smallexample
273
ff5dcc92 274This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
275result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
ff5dcc92 279Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
280point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
285occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287noted in the descriptions below.
288
289@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
290Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
294
295Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299message @samp{No input files}.
300
36f63dca 301If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
302assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
307@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
312
313For options whose names are a single letter,
314option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316option that requires them.
317
318For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 319precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 320@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 321this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 322only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
323@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325output.
326
327Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332accepted.
252b5132 333
36f63dca
NC
334Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
336prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
338
339@smallexample
2509a395 340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
341@end smallexample
342
343This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
344silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351@smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
354
355Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356linker:
357
ff5dcc92 358@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 359@include at-file.texi
dff70155 360
2509a395
SL
361@kindex -a @var{keyword}
362@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
363This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
7ee314fa
AM
369@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 376it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 377This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 378interface.
7ee314fa 379
252b5132
RH
380@ifset I960
381@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
382@kindex -A @var{arch}
383@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
384@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
386In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
388@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 390archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
391family}, for details.
392
ff5dcc92 393Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
394other architecture families.
395@end ifset
396
397@ifclear SingleFormat
398@cindex binary input format
399@kindex -b @var{format}
400@kindex --format=@var{format}
401@cindex input format
402@cindex input format
403@item -b @var{input-format}
404@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
405@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 407@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 408that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 409configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 410to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
411default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415@xref{BFD}.
416
417You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419linking object files of different formats), by including
420@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 421particular format.
252b5132
RH
422
423The default format is taken from the environment variable
424@code{GNUTARGET}.
425@ifset UsesEnvVars
426@xref{Environment}.
427@end ifset
428You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
429@code{TARGET};
430@ifclear man
431see @ref{Format Commands}.
432@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
433@end ifclear
434
435@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437@cindex compatibility, MRI
438@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 440For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 441files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
442@ifclear man
443@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444@end ifclear
445@ifset man
446the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447@end ifset
448Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 449the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
450scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
452specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454@cindex common allocation
455@kindex -d
456@kindex -dc
457@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 458@item -d
252b5132
RH
459@itemx -dc
460@itemx -dp
461These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
7ee314fa
AM
467@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 476The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 477
252b5132
RH
478@cindex entry point, from command line
479@kindex -e @var{entry}
480@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 481@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
482@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
b58f81ae
DJ
491@kindex --exclude-libs
492@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 494exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
495@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500be treated as hidden.
501
e1c37eb5
DK
502@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513regardless of this option.
514
252b5132
RH
515@cindex dynamic symbol table
516@kindex -E
517@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 518@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
519@item -E
520@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
521@itemx --no-export-dynamic
522When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
531
532If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535linking the program itself.
536
55255dae 537You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 538be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 539See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 540
8b747e1a
DK
541Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
36f63dca 545@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
546@cindex big-endian objects
547@cindex endianness
548@kindex -EB
549@item -EB
550Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552@cindex little-endian objects
553@kindex -EL
554@item -EL
555Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 556@end ifclear
252b5132 557
2509a395
SL
558@kindex -f @var{name}
559@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560@item -f @var{name}
561@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
562When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575machine specific performance.
576
577This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
2509a395
SL
580@kindex -F @var{name}
581@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 582@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 583@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
584When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595@var{name}.
596
ff5dcc92 597Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 598toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
599object files.
600@ifclear SingleFormat
601The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 602@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 603@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
604environment variable.
605@end ifclear
606The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 608
3dbf70a2 609@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
610@kindex -fini=@var{name}
611@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
612When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615the function to call.
616
252b5132
RH
617@kindex -g
618@item -g
619Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
2509a395
SL
621@kindex -G @var{value}
622@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 623@cindex object size
2509a395 624@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
625@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 628MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
629sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 632@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 633@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 634@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
635@itemx -soname=@var{name}
636When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642@kindex -i
643@cindex incremental link
644@item -i
645Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
3dbf70a2 647@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
648@kindex -init=@var{name}
649@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
650When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653function to call.
654
252b5132 655@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 656@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 657@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 658@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
659@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 663will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 664will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 665
ff5dcc92 666On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
667files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
674
675The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
ff5dcc92 682See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
683archives multiple times.
684
685You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687@ifset GENERIC
688This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 689if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
690behaviour of the AIX linker.
691@end ifset
692
693@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 694@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 695@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 696@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 697@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
698Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
700option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 703@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
704order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706option is specified.
252b5132 707
9c8ebd6a
DJ
708If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
709by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
710
252b5132
RH
711@ifset UsesEnvVars
712The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 713@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
714some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
715@end ifset
716
717The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
718@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
719at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
720
721@cindex emulation
722@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 723@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
724Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
725emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
726
727If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
728@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
729
730Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
731configured.
732
733@cindex link map
734@kindex -M
735@kindex --print-map
736@item -M
737@itemx --print-map
738Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
739information about the link, including the following:
740
741@itemize @bullet
742@item
3b83e13a 743Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
744@item
745How common symbols are allocated.
746@item
747All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
748which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
749@item
750The values assigned to symbols.
751
752Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
753involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
754have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
755linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
756of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
757the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
758linker script containing:
759
760@smallexample
761 foo = 1
762 foo = foo * 4
763 foo = foo + 8
764@end smallexample
765
766will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
767option is used:
768
769@smallexample
770 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
771 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
773@end smallexample
774
775See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
776scripts.
252b5132
RH
777@end itemize
778
779@kindex -n
780@cindex read-only text
781@cindex NMAGIC
782@kindex --nmagic
783@item -n
784@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
785Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
786libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
787mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
788
789@kindex -N
790@kindex --omagic
791@cindex read/write from cmd line
792@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 793@item -N
252b5132
RH
794@itemx --omagic
795Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
796not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
797libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
798mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
799is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
800specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
801
802@kindex --no-omagic
803@cindex OMAGIC
804@item --no-omagic
805This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
806sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
807be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
808shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
809
810@kindex -o @var{output}
811@kindex --output=@var{output}
812@cindex naming the output file
813@item -o @var{output}
814@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 815Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
816option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
817script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
818
819@kindex -O @var{level}
820@cindex generating optimized output
821@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 822If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 823the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
824should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
825option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
826the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
827no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
828of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 829
a712da20
NC
830@kindex -q
831@kindex --emit-relocs
832@cindex retain relocations in final executable
833@item -q
834@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 835Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
836Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
837order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
838in larger executables.
839
dbab7a7b
NC
840This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
841
4f471f39
RS
842@kindex --force-dynamic
843@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
844@item --force-dynamic
845Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
846to VxWorks targets.
847
252b5132
RH
848@cindex partial link
849@cindex relocatable output
850@kindex -r
1049f94e 851@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 852@item -r
1049f94e 853@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 854Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 855turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
856linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
857magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
858@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 859@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
860If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
861linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
862constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
863
62bf86b4
HPN
864When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
865partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
866relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
867example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
868with input files in other formats at all.
869
252b5132
RH
870This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
871
872@kindex -R @var{file}
873@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
874@cindex symbol-only input
875@item -R @var{filename}
876@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
877Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
878relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
879to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
880programs. You may use this option more than once.
881
ff5dcc92 882For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 883followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 884the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
885
886@kindex -s
887@kindex --strip-all
888@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 889@item -s
252b5132
RH
890@itemx --strip-all
891Omit all symbol information from the output file.
892
893@kindex -S
894@kindex --strip-debug
895@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 896@item -S
252b5132
RH
897@itemx --strip-debug
898Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
899
900@kindex -t
901@kindex --trace
902@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 903@item -t
252b5132 904@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 905Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
906
907@kindex -T @var{script}
908@kindex --script=@var{script}
909@cindex script files
910@item -T @var{scriptfile}
911@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
912Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 913@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 914@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
915output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
916the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
917specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
918options accumulate.
252b5132 919
14be8564
L
920@kindex -dT @var{script}
921@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
922@cindex script files
923@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
924@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
925Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
926
927This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
928processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
929command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
930@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
931behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
932command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
933the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
934@samp{gcc}).
935
252b5132
RH
936@kindex -u @var{symbol}
937@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
938@cindex undefined symbol
939@item -u @var{symbol}
940@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
941Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
942symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
943modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
944different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
945option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
946
947@kindex -Ur
948@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 949@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
950For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
951@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 952turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
953@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
954It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
955with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
956be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
957@samp{-r} for the others.
958
577a0623
AM
959@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
960@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
961Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
962@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
963missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
964specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
965multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
966input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
967in a linker script.
a854a4a7 968
252b5132
RH
969@kindex -v
970@kindex -V
971@kindex --version
972@cindex version
973@item -v
974@itemx --version
975@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 976Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
977lists the supported emulations.
978
979@kindex -x
980@kindex --discard-all
981@cindex deleting local symbols
982@item -x
983@itemx --discard-all
984Delete all local symbols.
985
986@kindex -X
987@kindex --discard-locals
988@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 989@item -X
252b5132 990@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
991Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
992system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
993or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
994
995@kindex -y @var{symbol}
996@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
997@cindex symbol tracing
998@item -y @var{symbol}
999@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1000Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1001option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1002to prepend an underscore.
1003
1004This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1005don't know where the reference is coming from.
1006
1007@kindex -Y @var{path}
1008@item -Y @var{path}
1009Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1010for Solaris compatibility.
1011
1012@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1013@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1014The recognized keywords are:
1015@table @samp
1016
1017@item combreloc
1018Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1019lookup caching possible.
1020
1021@item defs
560e09e9 1022Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1023shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1024
6aa29e7b
JJ
1025@item execstack
1026Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1027
b039ef04
L
1028@item global
1029This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1030the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1031of subsequently loaded libraries.
1032
cd6d6c15
NC
1033@item initfirst
1034This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1035It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1036before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1037the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1038the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1039objects.
1040
1041@item interpose
1042Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1043but the primary executable.
1044
5fa222e4
AM
1045@item lazy
1046When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1047dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1048the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1049Lazy binding is the default.
1050
cd6d6c15
NC
1051@item loadfltr
1052Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1053runtime.
1054
1055@item muldefs
1056Allows multiple definitions.
1057
1058@item nocombreloc
1059Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1060
1061@item nocopyreloc
1062Disables production of copy relocs.
1063
1064@item nodefaultlib
1065Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1066ignore any default library search paths.
1067
1068@item nodelete
1069Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1070
1071@item nodlopen
1072Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1073
1074@item nodump
1075Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1076
6aa29e7b
JJ
1077@item noexecstack
1078Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1079
1080@item norelro
1081Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1082
cd6d6c15
NC
1083@item now
1084When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1085dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1086when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1087deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1088first called.
1089
1090@item origin
1091Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1092
6aa29e7b
JJ
1093@item relro
1094Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1095
24718e3b
L
1096@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1097Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1098
1099@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1100Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1101
04c3a755
NS
1102@item stack-size=@var{value}
1103Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1104Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1105@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1106
cd6d6c15
NC
1107@end table
1108
ece2d90e 1109Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1110
1111@kindex -(
1112@cindex groups of archives
1113@item -( @var{archives} -)
1114@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1115The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1116either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1117
1118The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1119references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1120the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1121archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1122object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1123would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1124they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1125resolved.
1126
1127Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1128it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1129more archives.
1130
69da35b5
NC
1131@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1132@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1133@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1134@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1135Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1136recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1137and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1138the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1139behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1140so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1141restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1142
4a43e768
AM
1143@kindex --as-needed
1144@kindex --no-as-needed
1145@item --as-needed
1146@itemx --no-as-needed
1147This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1148on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1149the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1150on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1151needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1152emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1153non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1154the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries, a
1155non-weak undefined symbol reference from another dynamic library.
1156Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1157the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1158needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1159from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1160
e56f61be
L
1161@kindex --add-needed
1162@kindex --no-add-needed
1163@item --add-needed
1164@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1165These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1166their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1167options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1168and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1169
252b5132
RH
1170@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1171@item -assert @var{keyword}
1172This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1173
1174@kindex -Bdynamic
1175@kindex -dy
1176@kindex -call_shared
1177@item -Bdynamic
1178@itemx -dy
1179@itemx -call_shared
1180Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1181for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1182default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1183for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1184multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1185@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1186
a1ab1d2a
UD
1187@kindex -Bgroup
1188@item -Bgroup
1189Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1190section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1191object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1192@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1193only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1194
252b5132
RH
1195@kindex -Bstatic
1196@kindex -dn
1197@kindex -non_shared
1198@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1199@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1200@itemx -dn
1201@itemx -non_shared
1202@itemx -static
1203Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1204platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1205variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1206may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1207library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1208option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1209option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1210shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1211references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1212libraries.
252b5132
RH
1213
1214@kindex -Bsymbolic
1215@item -Bsymbolic
1216When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1217definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1218for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1219within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1220platforms which support shared libraries.
1221
40b36307
L
1222@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1223@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1224When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1225symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1226This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1227libraries.
1228
55255dae
L
1229@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1230@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1231Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1232typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1233global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1234within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1235to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1236in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1237which support shared libraries.
1238
1239The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1240scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1241
40b36307
L
1242@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1243@item --dynamic-list-data
1244Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1245
1246@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1247@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1248Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1249is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1250
0b8a70d9
L
1251@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1252@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1253Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1254
252b5132
RH
1255@kindex --check-sections
1256@kindex --no-check-sections
1257@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1258@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1259Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1260been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1261perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1262suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1263allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1264restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1265Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1266force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1267option.
252b5132 1268
ddbb8a31
NC
1269@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1270@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1271@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1272@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1273This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1274by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1275command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1276output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1277input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1278specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1279follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1280behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1281
1282This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1283libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1284mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1285their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1286required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1287the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1288dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1289symbols.
1290
252b5132
RH
1291@cindex cross reference table
1292@kindex --cref
1293@item --cref
1294Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1295generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1296Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1297
1298The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1299easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1300sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1301symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1302definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1303where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1304symbol are listed.
252b5132 1305
4818e05f
AM
1306@cindex common allocation
1307@kindex --no-define-common
1308@item --no-define-common
1309This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1310The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1311@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1312
1313The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1314the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1315of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1316forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1317Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1318from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1319This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1320and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1321duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1322paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1323
252b5132 1324@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1325@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1326@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1327Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1328address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1329times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1330limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1331context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1332symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1333constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1334using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1335Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1336space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1337@var{expression}.
1338
1339@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1340@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1341@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1342@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1343@itemx --no-demangle
1344These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1345and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1346present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1347underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1348mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1349different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1350to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1351demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1352is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1353
1354@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1355@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1356@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1357@item -I@var{file}
1358@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1359Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1360generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1361linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1362doing.
1363
7ce691ae 1364@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1365@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1366@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1367@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1368Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1369with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1370
252b5132
RH
1371@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1372@item --force-exe-suffix
1373Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1374
1375If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1376@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1377the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1378option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1379Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1380it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1381
1382@kindex --gc-sections
1383@kindex --no-gc-sections
1384@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1385@item --gc-sections
1386@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1387Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1388targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1389performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1390@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1391
d5465ba2
AM
1392@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1393examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1394symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1395command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1396referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1397libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1398referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1399the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1400relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1401
ac69cbc6 1402This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1403@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1404specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1405a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1406
c17d87de
NC
1407@kindex --print-gc-sections
1408@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1409@cindex garbage collection
1410@item --print-gc-sections
1411@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1412List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1413printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1414collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1415default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1416be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1417line.
1418
30824704
RM
1419@kindex --print-output-format
1420@cindex output format
1421@item --print-output-format
1422Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1423other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1424in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1425
252b5132
RH
1426@cindex help
1427@cindex usage
1428@kindex --help
1429@item --help
1430Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1431
ea20a7da
CC
1432@kindex --target-help
1433@item --target-help
1434Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1435
2509a395
SL
1436@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1437@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1438Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1439@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1440
1441@cindex memory usage
1442@kindex --no-keep-memory
1443@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1444@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1445symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1446instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1447necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1448while linking a large executable.
1449
1450@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1451@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1452@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1453@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1454Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1455is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1456The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1457behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1458libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1459
aa713662
L
1460@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1461@kindex -z muldefs
1462@item --allow-multiple-definition
1463@itemx -z muldefs
1464Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1465report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1466first definition will be used.
1467
b79e8c78 1468@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1469@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1470@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1471@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1472Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1473This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1474determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1475shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1476how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1477
903249d7
NC
1478The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1479referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1480an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1481a shared library.
1482
1483The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1484libraries specified at link time are that:
1485
1486@itemize @bullet
1487@item
1488A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1489that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1490resolvable at load time.
1491@item
1492There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1493symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1494
1495The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1496select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1497architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1498appropriate memset function.
1499@end itemize
b79e8c78 1500
31941635
L
1501@kindex --no-undefined-version
1502@item --no-undefined-version
1503Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1504it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1505will be issued instead.
1506
3e3b46e5
PB
1507@kindex --default-symver
1508@item --default-symver
1509Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1510exported symbols.
1511
1512@kindex --default-imported-symver
1513@item --default-imported-symver
1514Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1515imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1516
252b5132
RH
1517@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1518@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1519Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1520files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1521been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1522This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1523errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1524have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1525inappropriate.
1526
fe7929ce
AM
1527@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1528@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1529Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1530library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1531
252b5132
RH
1532@kindex --no-whole-archive
1533@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1534Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1535archive files.
1536
1537@cindex output file after errors
1538@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1539@item --noinhibit-exec
1540Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1541Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1542errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1543when it issues any error whatsoever.
1544
0a9c1c8e
CD
1545@kindex -nostdlib
1546@item -nostdlib
1547Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1548command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1549(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1550
252b5132 1551@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1552@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1553@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1554@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1555file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1556@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1557object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1558object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1559should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1560usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1561name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1562list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1563command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1564this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1565@end ifclear
1566
36af4a4e
JJ
1567@kindex -pie
1568@kindex --pic-executable
1569@item -pie
1570@itemx --pic-executable
1571@cindex position independent executables
1572Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1573ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1574libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1575address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1576normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1577defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1578
252b5132
RH
1579@kindex -qmagic
1580@item -qmagic
1581This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1582
1583@kindex -Qy
1584@item -Qy
1585This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1586
1587@kindex --relax
1588@cindex synthesizing linker
1589@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1590@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1591@item --relax
28d5f677 1592@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1593An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1594@ifset GENERIC
1595This option is only supported on a few targets.
1596@end ifset
1597@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1598@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1599@end ifset
1600@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1601@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1602@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1603@ifset XTENSA
1604@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1605@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1606@ifset M68HC11
1607@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1608@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1609@ifset NIOSII
1610@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1611@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1612@ifset POWERPC
1613@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1614@end ifset
252b5132 1615
28d5f677
NC
1616On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1617global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1618addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1619synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1620instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1621
1622On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1623debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1624@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1625This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1626family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1627@end ifset
1628
1629@ifset GENERIC
1630On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1631but ignored.
1632@end ifset
1633
28d5f677
NC
1634On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1635@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1636
252b5132
RH
1637@cindex retaining specified symbols
1638@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1639@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1640@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1641@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1642Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1643discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1644symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1645@ifset GENERIC
1646(such as VxWorks)
1647@end ifset
1648where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1649run-time memory.
1650
1651@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1652or symbols needed for relocations.
1653
1654You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1655line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1656
1657@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1658@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1659@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1660@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1661Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1662linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1663arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1664them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1665also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1666objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1667@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1668ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1669@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1670
ff5dcc92 1671The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1672SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1673@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1674runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1675options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1676gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1677file systems.
252b5132 1678
ff5dcc92 1679For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1680followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1681the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1682@end ifset
1683
1684@ifset GENERIC
1685@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1686@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1687@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1688When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1689happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1690of the input files.
1691
1692When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1693non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1694shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1695explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1696specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1697@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1698either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1699appearing multiple times.
1700
28c309a2
NC
1701This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1702that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1703is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1704runtime linker would do.
1705
252b5132 1706The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1707libraries:
252b5132
RH
1708@enumerate
1709@item
ff5dcc92 1710Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1711@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1712Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1713between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1714specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1715used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1716at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1717by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1718the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1719@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1720On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1721@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1722environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1723@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1724On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1725directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1726@item
a1b8d843 1727For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 1728variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1729@item
ec4eb78a
L
1730For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1731@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1732libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1733@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1734@item
252b5132
RH
1735The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1736@item
1737For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1738exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1739@end enumerate
1740
1741If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1742warning and continue with the link.
1743@end ifset
1744
1745@kindex -shared
1746@kindex -Bshareable
1747@item -shared
1748@itemx -Bshareable
1749@cindex shared libraries
1750Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1751and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1752shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1753undefined symbols in the link.
1754
252b5132 1755@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1756@item --sort-common
1757@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1758@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1759This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1760ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1761sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1762eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1763between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1764specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1765
2509a395
SL
1766@kindex --sort-section=name
1767@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1768This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1769patterns in the linker script.
1770
2509a395
SL
1771@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1772@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1773This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1774patterns in the linker script.
1775
252b5132 1776@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1777@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1778Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1779each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1780size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1781
1782@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1783@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1784Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1785output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1786This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1787certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1788cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1789that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1790support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1791input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1792more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1793many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1794
1795@kindex --stats
1796@item --stats
1797Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1798as execution time and memory usage.
1799
2509a395 1800@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1801@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1802Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1803configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1804that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1805
252b5132
RH
1806@kindex --traditional-format
1807@cindex traditional format
1808@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1809For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1810the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1811use the traditional format instead.
1812
1813@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1814For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1815symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1816full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1817@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1818trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1819combine duplicate entries.
1820
2509a395
SL
1821@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1822@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1823Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1824address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1825times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1826line.
1827@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1828for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1829@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1830should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1831sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1832
2509a395
SL
1833@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1834@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1835@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1836@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1837@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1838@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1839@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1840Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1841@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1842
2509a395
SL
1843@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1844@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 1845@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
1846When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
1847byte of the text segment.
258795f5 1848
9d5777a3
RM
1849@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1850@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1851@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
1852When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
1853the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
1854text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
1855
0d705e9f
AM
1856@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1857@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1858@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
1859When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
1860model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
1861
560e09e9
NC
1862@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1863@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1864Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1865values for @samp{method}:
1866
1867@table @samp
1868@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1869Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1870
1871@item report-all
da8bce14 1872Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1873
1874@item ignore-in-object-files
1875Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1876ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1877
1878@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1879Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1880ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1881when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1882libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1883command line.
1884@end table
1885
1886The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1887by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1888
1889Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1890unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1891can change this to a warning.
1892
1715a13c
L
1893@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1894@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 1895@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 1896@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 1897Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1898supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
1899the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
1900argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
1901
1902@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1903@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 1904@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
1905Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1906used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1907about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
1908is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1909see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1910use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1911symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1912@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 1913
7ce691ae 1914@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1915@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1916@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1917@item --warn-common
1918Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 1919a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
1920but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1921you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 1922Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1923warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1924
1925There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1926
1927@table @samp
1928@item int i = 1;
1929A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1930file.
1931
1932@item extern int i;
1933An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1934There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1935variable somewhere.
1936
1937@item int i;
1938A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1939variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1940The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1941single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1942size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1943a definition of the same variable.
1944@end table
1945
1946The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1947Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1948just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1949encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1950a common symbol.
1951
1952@enumerate
1953@item
1954Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1955definition for the symbol.
1956@smallexample
1957@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1958 overridden by definition
1959@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1960@end smallexample
1961
1962@item
1963Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1964the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1965except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1966@smallexample
1967@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1968 overriding common
1969@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1970@end smallexample
1971
1972@item
1973Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1974@smallexample
1975@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1976 of `@var{symbol}'
1977@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1978@end smallexample
1979
1980@item
1981Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1982@smallexample
1983@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1984 overridden by larger common
1985@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1986@end smallexample
1987
1988@item
1989Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1990the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1991encountered in a different order.
1992@smallexample
1993@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1994 overriding smaller common
1995@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1996@end smallexample
1997@end enumerate
1998
1999@kindex --warn-constructors
2000@item --warn-constructors
2001Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2002object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2003detect the use of global constructors.
2004
2005@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2006@item --warn-multiple-gp
2007Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2008This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2009Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2010section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2011of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2012base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2013base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2014bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2015large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2016values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2017option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2018
2019@kindex --warn-once
2020@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2021@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2022@item --warn-once
2023Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2024which refers to it.
2025
2026@kindex --warn-section-align
2027@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2028@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2029@item --warn-section-align
2030Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2031alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2032The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2033is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2034the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2035
8fdd7217
NC
2036@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2037@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2038Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2039
a0c402a5
L
2040@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2041@item --warn-alternate-em
2042Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2043
560e09e9
NC
2044@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2045@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2046If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2047@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2048This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2049
2050@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2051@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2052This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2053it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2054
252b5132
RH
2055@kindex --whole-archive
2056@cindex including an entire archive
2057@item --whole-archive
2058For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2059@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2060in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2061files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2062library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2063library. This option may be used more than once.
2064
7ec229ce 2065Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2066about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2067Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2068list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2069your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2070
2509a395
SL
2071@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2072@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2073Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2074@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2075undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2076@var{symbol}.
2077
2078This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2079wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2080wishes to call the system function, it should call
2081@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2082
2083Here is a trivial example:
2084
2085@smallexample
2086void *
cc2f008e 2087__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2088@{
cc2f008e 2089 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2090 return __real_malloc (c);
2091@}
2092@end smallexample
2093
ff5dcc92 2094If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2095all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2096instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2097call the real @code{malloc} function.
2098
2099You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2100links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2101you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2102file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2103call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2104
6aa29e7b
JJ
2105@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2106@item --eh-frame-hdr
2107Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2108@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2109
e41b3a13
JJ
2110@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2111@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2112Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2113generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2114if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2115
6c1439be
L
2116@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2117@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2118@item --enable-new-dtags
2119@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2120This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2121systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2122@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2123and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2124If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2125created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2126those options are only available for ELF systems.
2127
2d643429 2128@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2129@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2130Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2131close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2132time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2133increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2134value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2135
fdc90cb4
JJ
2136@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2137@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2138Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2139@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2140new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2141the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2142hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2143
35835446
JR
2144@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2145@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2146This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2147linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2148for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2149about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2150
4f9c04f7 2151Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 21521021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2153run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2154has been used.
2155
2156The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2157enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2158
c0065db7
RM
2159@kindex --build-id
2160@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2161@item --build-id
2162@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c
JT
2163Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2164or a @code{.build-id} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2165unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2166@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2167@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2168@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2169the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2170string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2171@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2172is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2173
2174The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2175that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2176unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2177to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2178file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2179string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2180
2181Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2182@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2183@end table
2184
0285c67d
NC
2185@c man end
2186
36f63dca 2187@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2188
0285c67d
NC
2189@c man begin OPTIONS
2190
ff5dcc92 2191The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2192the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2193normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2194use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2195@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2196like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2197symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2198object file).
2199
2200In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2201support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2202PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2203values by either a space or an equals sign.
2204
ff5dcc92 2205@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2206
2207@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2208@item --add-stdcall-alias
2209If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2210as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2211[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2212
2213@kindex --base-file
2214@item --base-file @var{file}
2215Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2216addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2217@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2218[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2219
2220@kindex --dll
2221@item --dll
2222Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2223@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2224file.
bb10df36 2225[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2226
88183869
DK
2227@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2228@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2229@item --enable-long-section-names
2230@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2231The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2232the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2233for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2234fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2235to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2236allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2237disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2238generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2239as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2240with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2241GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2242information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2243option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2244section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2245when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2246image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2247[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2248
252b5132
RH
2249@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2250@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2251@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2252@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2253If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2254do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2255only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2256resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2257undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2258@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2259to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2260warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2261import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2262to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2263feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2264@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2265mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2266[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2267
522f09cd
KT
2268@kindex --leading-underscore
2269@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2270@item --leading-underscore
2271@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2272For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2273in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2274disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2275
252b5132
RH
2276@cindex DLLs, creating
2277@kindex --export-all-symbols
2278@item --export-all-symbols
2279If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2280be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2281otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2282explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2283attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2284option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2285@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2286@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2287exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2288re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2289such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2290@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2291@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2292Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2293not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2294extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2295(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2296These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2297@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2298@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2299@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2300@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2301[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2302
2303@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2304@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2305Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2306exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2307[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2308
2927aaca
NC
2309@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2310@item --exclude-all-symbols
2311Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2312[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2313
252b5132
RH
2314@kindex --file-alignment
2315@item --file-alignment
2316Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2317file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2318512.
bb10df36 2319[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2320
2321@cindex heap size
2322@kindex --heap
2323@item --heap @var{reserve}
2324@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2325Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2326to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2327committed.
bb10df36 2328[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2329
2330@cindex image base
2331@kindex --image-base
2332@item --image-base @var{value}
2333Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2334the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2335is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2336your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2337other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2338for dlls.
bb10df36 2339[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2340
2341@kindex --kill-at
2342@item --kill-at
2343If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2344symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2345[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2346
26d2d8a2
BF
2347@kindex --large-address-aware
2348@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2349If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2350header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2351greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2352or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2353section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2354[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2355
f69a2f97
NC
2356@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2357@item --disable-large-address-aware
2358Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2359This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2360driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2361addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2362[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2363
252b5132
RH
2364@kindex --major-image-version
2365@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2366Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2367[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2368
2369@kindex --major-os-version
2370@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2371Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2372[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2373
2374@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2375@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2376Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2377[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2378
2379@kindex --minor-image-version
2380@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2381Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2382[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2383
2384@kindex --minor-os-version
2385@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2386Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2387[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2388
2389@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2390@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2391Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2392[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2393
2394@cindex DEF files, creating
2395@cindex DLLs, creating
2396@kindex --output-def
2397@item --output-def @var{file}
2398The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2399file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2400(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2401library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2402automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2403[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2404
b044cda1
CW
2405@cindex DLLs, creating
2406@kindex --out-implib
2407@item --out-implib @var{file}
2408The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2409import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2410import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2411may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2412makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2413creation step.
bb10df36 2414[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2415
2416@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2417@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2418@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2419Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2420@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2421By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2422for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2423execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2424[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2425
2426@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2427@item --disable-auto-image-base
2428Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2429user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2430default.
bb10df36 2431[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2432
2433@cindex DLLs, linking to
2434@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2435@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2436When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2437search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2438@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2439between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2440uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2441@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2442[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2443
2444@kindex --enable-auto-import
2445@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2446Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2447DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2448building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2449'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2450to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2451specification published by Microsoft.
2452
e2a83dd0
NC
2453Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2454data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2455placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2456around a problem with consts that is described here:
2457http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2458
4d8907ac
DS
2459Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2460see this message:
0d888aac 2461
ece2d90e 2462"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2463documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2464
ece2d90e
NC
2465This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2466ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2467allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2468fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2469constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2470multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2471this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2472of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2473the warning, and exit.
2474
2475There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2476data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2477
2fa9fc65
NC
2478One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2479of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2480this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2481
c0065db7
RM
2482A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2483that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2484there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2485a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2486
2487@example
2488extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2489extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2490 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2491@end example
2492
2493or
2494
2495@example
2496extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2497extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2498 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2499@end example
2500
c0065db7 2501For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2502is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2503
2504@example
2505extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2506extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2507 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2508@end example
2509
c406afaf
NC
2510or
2511
2512@example
2513extern long long extern_ll;
2514extern_ll -->
2515 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2516@end example
2517
2fa9fc65 2518A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2519'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2520@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2521requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2522building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2523merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2524between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2525constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2526
2527Original:
2528@example
2529--foo.h
2530extern int arr[];
2531--foo.c
2532#include "foo.h"
2533void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2534 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2535@}
2536@end example
2537
2538Solution 1:
2539@example
2540--foo.h
2541extern int arr[];
2542--foo.c
2543#include "foo.h"
2544void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2545 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2546 volatile int *parr = arr;
2547 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2548@}
2549@end example
2550
2551Solution 2:
2552@example
2553--foo.h
2554/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2555#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2556 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2557#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2558#else
2559#define FOO_IMPORT
2560#endif
2561extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2562--foo.c
2563#include "foo.h"
2564void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2565 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2566@}
2567@end example
2568
c0065db7 2569A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2570library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2571for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2572functions).
bb10df36 2573[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2574
2575@kindex --disable-auto-import
2576@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2577Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2578@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2579[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2580
2fa9fc65
NC
2581@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2582@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2583If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2584that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2585a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2586environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2587[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2588
2589@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2590@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2591Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
676ee43b 2592DLLs.
bb10df36 2593[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2594
b044cda1
CW
2595@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2596@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2597Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2598[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2599
252b5132
RH
2600@kindex --section-alignment
2601@item --section-alignment
2602Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2603addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2604[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2605
2606@cindex stack size
2607@kindex --stack
2608@item --stack @var{reserve}
2609@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2610Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2611to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2612committed.
bb10df36 2613[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2614
2615@kindex --subsystem
2616@item --subsystem @var{which}
2617@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2618@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2619Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2620legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2621@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2622the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2623@var{which}.
bb10df36 2624[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2625
2f563b51
DK
2626The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2627of the PE file header:
2628[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2629
2630@kindex --dynamicbase
2631@item --dynamicbase
2632The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2633randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2634Vista for i386 PE targets.
2635
2636@kindex --forceinteg
2637@item --forceinteg
2638Code integrity checks are enforced.
2639
2640@kindex --nxcompat
2641@item --nxcompat
2642The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2643This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2644
2645@kindex --no-isolation
2646@item --no-isolation
2647Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2648
2649@kindex --no-seh
2650@item --no-seh
2651The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2652this image.
2653
2654@kindex --no-bind
2655@item --no-bind
2656Do not bind this image.
2657
2658@kindex --wdmdriver
2659@item --wdmdriver
2660The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2661
2f563b51
DK
2662@kindex --tsaware
2663@item --tsaware
2664The image is Terminal Server aware.
2665
0cb112f7
CF
2666@kindex --insert-timestamp
2667@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
2668@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2669Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2670as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2671other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
2672will result in slightly different images being produced each tiem the
2673same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2674can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
2675that binaries produced from indentical sources will compare
2676identically.
252b5132
RH
2677@end table
2678
0285c67d
NC
2679@c man end
2680
ac145307
BS
2681@ifset C6X
2682@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2683
2684@c man begin OPTIONS
2685
2686The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2687libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2688all executables use an index of 0.
2689
2690@table @gcctabopt
2691
2692@kindex --dsbt-size
2693@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2694This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current executable
2695or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2696entries.
2697
2698@kindex --dsbt-index
2699@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2700This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2701to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2702executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2703@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2704
fbd9ad90
PB
2705@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2706The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2707exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2708
ac145307
BS
2709@end table
2710
2711@c man end
2712@end ifset
2713
93fd0973
SC
2714@ifset M68HC11
2715@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2716
2717@c man begin OPTIONS
2718
2719The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2720memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2721
2722@table @gcctabopt
2723
2724@kindex --no-trampoline
2725@item --no-trampoline
2726This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2727is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2728instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2729
2730@kindex --bank-window
2731@item --bank-window @var{name}
2732This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2733the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2734The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2735paging and addresses within the memory window.
2736
2737@end table
2738
2739@c man end
2740@end ifset
2741
7fb9f789
NC
2742@ifset M68K
2743@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2744
2745@c man begin OPTIONS
2746
2747The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2748when linking for 68K targets.
2749
2750@table @gcctabopt
2751
2752@kindex --got
2753@item --got=@var{type}
2754This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2755@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2756@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2757Info entry for @file{ld}.
2758
2759@end table
2760
2761@c man end
2762@end ifset
2763
833794fc
MR
2764@ifset MIPS
2765@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
2766
2767@c man begin OPTIONS
2768
2769The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
2770generation when linking for MIPS targets.
2771
2772@table @gcctabopt
2773
2774@kindex --insn32
2775@item --insn32
2776@kindex --no-insn32
2777@itemx --no-insn32
2778These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
2779generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
2780or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
278132-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
2782used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
2783possible.
2784
2785@end table
2786
2787@c man end
2788@end ifset
2789
252b5132
RH
2790@ifset UsesEnvVars
2791@node Environment
2792@section Environment Variables
2793
0285c67d
NC
2794@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2795
560e09e9 2796You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2797@ifclear SingleFormat
2798@code{GNUTARGET},
2799@end ifclear
2800@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2801
36f63dca 2802@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2803@kindex GNUTARGET
2804@cindex default input format
2805@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2806use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2807of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2808@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2809of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2810attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2811this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2812there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2813object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2814BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2815in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2816@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2817
2818@kindex LDEMULATION
2819@cindex default emulation
2820@cindex emulation, default
2821@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2822@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2823behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2824available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2825the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2826variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2827linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2828
2829@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2830@cindex demangling, default
2831Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2832@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2833default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2834a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2835may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2836options.
2837
0285c67d
NC
2838@c man end
2839@end ifset
2840
252b5132
RH
2841@node Scripts
2842@chapter Linker Scripts
2843
2844@cindex scripts
2845@cindex linker scripts
2846@cindex command files
2847Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2848written in the linker command language.
2849
2850The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2851the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2852the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2853more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2854direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2855described below.
2856
2857The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2858yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2859linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2860to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2861such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2862
2863You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2864line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2865default linker script.
2866
2867You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2868to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2869Linker Scripts}.
2870
2871@menu
2872* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2873* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2874* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2875* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2876* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2877* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2878* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2879* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2880* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2881* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2882* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2883@end menu
2884
2885@node Basic Script Concepts
2886@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2887@cindex linker script concepts
2888We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2889describe the linker script language.
2890
2891The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2892file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2893@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2894The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2895purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2896among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2897section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2898in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2899
2900Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2901also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 2902contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
2903the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2904A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2905area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2906loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2907which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2908of debugging information.
2909
2910Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2911first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2912the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2913@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2914section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2915same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2916is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2917(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2918based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2919RAM address would be the VMA.
2920
2921You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2922program with the @samp{-h} option.
2923
2924Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2925@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2926has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2927information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2928will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2929static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2930referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2931
2932You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2933program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2934option.
2935
2936@node Script Format
2937@section Linker Script Format
2938@cindex linker script format
2939Linker scripts are text files.
2940
2941You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2942either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2943symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2944generally ignored.
2945
2946Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2947If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2948otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2949double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2950file name.
2951
2952You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2953@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2954to whitespace.
2955
2956@node Simple Example
2957@section Simple Linker Script Example
2958@cindex linker script example
2959@cindex example of linker script
2960Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2961
2962The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2963@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2964memory layout of the output file.
2965
2966The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2967describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2968code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2969@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2970Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2971your input files.
2972
2973For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
29740x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2975linker script which will do that:
2976@smallexample
2977SECTIONS
2978@{
2979 . = 0x10000;
2980 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2981 . = 0x8000000;
2982 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2983 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2984@}
2985@end smallexample
2986
2987You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2988followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2989descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2990
252b5132
RH
2991The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2992sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2993counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2994other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2995current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2996incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2997@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2998
2999The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3000required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3001after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3002which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3003wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3004means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3005
3006Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3007@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3008@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3009
3010The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3011the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3012at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3013output section, the value of the location counter will be
3014@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3015effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3016immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3017
3018The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3019alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3020example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3021sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3022may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3023sections.
3024
3025That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3026
3027@node Simple Commands
3028@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3029@cindex linker script simple commands
3030In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3031
3032@menu
3033* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3034* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3035@ifclear SingleFormat
3036* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3037@end ifclear
3038
4a93e180 3039* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3040* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3041@end menu
3042
3043@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3044@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3045@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3046@cindex start of execution
3047@cindex first instruction
3048@cindex entry point
3049The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3050point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3051entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3052@smallexample
3053ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3054@end smallexample
3055
3056There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3057entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3058stopping when one of them succeeds:
3059@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3060@item
252b5132 3061the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3062@item
252b5132 3063the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3064@item
3ab904c4
NC
3065the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3066targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3067check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3068@item
252b5132 3069the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3070@item
252b5132
RH
3071The address @code{0}.
3072@end itemize
3073
3074@node File Commands
36f63dca 3075@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3076@cindex linker script file commands
3077Several linker script commands deal with files.
3078
3079@table @code
3080@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3081@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3082@cindex including a linker script
3083Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3084be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3085with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
308610 levels deep.
3087
4006703d
NS
3088You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3089@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3090
252b5132
RH
3091@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3092@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3093@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3094@cindex input files in linker scripts
3095@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3096@cindex linker script input object files
3097The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3098in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3099
3100For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3101a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3102then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3103
3104In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3105script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3106
e3f2db7f
AO
3107In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3108with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3109located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3110for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3111open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3112linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
3113description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3114
ff5dcc92 3115If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3116name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3117@samp{-l}.
3118
3119When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3120files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3121script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3122
3123@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3124@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3125@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3126@cindex grouping input files
3127The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3128files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3129new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3130in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3131
b717d30e
JJ
3132@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3133@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3134@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3135This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3136commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3137as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3138with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3139when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3140@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3141and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3142setting afterwards.
3143
252b5132
RH
3144@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3145@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3146@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3147The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3148@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3149@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3150Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3151precedence.
3152
3153You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3154output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3155
3156@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3157@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3158@cindex library search path in linker script
3159@cindex archive search path in linker script
3160@cindex search path in linker script
3161The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3162@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3163@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3164on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3165are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3166the command line option are searched first.
3167
3168@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3169@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3170@cindex first input file
3171The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3172that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3173though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3174when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3175first file.
3176@end table
3177
3178@ifclear SingleFormat
3179@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3180@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3181A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3182
3183@table @code
3184@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3185@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3186@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3187@cindex output file format in linker script
3188The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3189output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3190exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3191(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3192line option takes precedence.
3193
3194You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3195formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3196This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3197desired endianness.
3198
3199If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3200will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3201output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3202used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3203
3204For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3205command:
3206@smallexample
3207OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3208@end smallexample
3209This says that the default format for the output file is
3210@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3211option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3212format.
3213
3214@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3215@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3216@cindex input file format in linker script
3217The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3218files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3219This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3220(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3221is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3222command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3223@end table
3224@end ifclear
3225
4a93e180
NC
3226@node REGION_ALIAS
3227@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3228@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3229@cindex region alias
3230@cindex region names
3231
3232Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3233@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3234
3235@smallexample
3236REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3237@end smallexample
3238
3239The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3240memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3241to memory regions. An example follows.
3242
3243Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3244memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3245that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3246non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3247access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3248read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3249sections:
3250
3251@itemize @bullet
3252@item
3253@code{.text} program code;
3254@item
3255@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3256@item
3257@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3258@item
3259@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3260@end itemize
3261
3262The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3263part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3264output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3265systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3266@code{C}:
3267@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3268@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3269@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3270@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3271@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3272@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3273@end multitable
3274The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3275loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3276the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3277the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3278
3279The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3280includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3281memory layout:
3282@smallexample
3283INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3284
3285SECTIONS
3286 @{
3287 .text :
3288 @{
3289 *(.text)
3290 @} > REGION_TEXT
3291 .rodata :
3292 @{
3293 *(.rodata)
3294 rodata_end = .;
3295 @} > REGION_RODATA
3296 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3297 @{
3298 data_start = .;
3299 *(.data)
3300 @} > REGION_DATA
3301 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3302 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3303 .bss :
3304 @{
3305 *(.bss)
3306 @} > REGION_BSS
3307 @}
3308@end smallexample
3309
3310Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3311regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3312variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3313@table @code
3314@item A
3315Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3316@smallexample
3317MEMORY
3318 @{
3319 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3320 @}
3321
3322REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3323REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3324REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3325REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3326@end smallexample
3327@item B
3328Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3329into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3330@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3331@smallexample
3332MEMORY
3333 @{
3334 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3335 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3336 @}
3337
3338REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3339REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3340REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3341REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3342@end smallexample
3343@item C
3344Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3345@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3346initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3347system start into the @code{RAM}.
3348@smallexample
3349MEMORY
3350 @{
3351 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3352 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3353 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3354 @}
3355
3356REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3357REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3358REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3359REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3360@end smallexample
3361@end table
3362
3363It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3364@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3365necessary:
3366@smallexample
3367#include <string.h>
3368
3369extern char data_start [];
3370extern char data_size [];
3371extern char data_load_start [];
3372
3373void copy_data(void)
3374@{
3375 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3376 @{
3377 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3378 @}
3379@}
3380@end smallexample
3381
252b5132 3382@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3383@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3384There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3385
3386@table @code
3387@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3388@kindex ASSERT
3389@cindex assertion in linker script
3390Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3391with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3392
3393@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3394@kindex EXTERN
3395@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3396Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3397symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3398modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3399each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3400command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3401
3402@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3403@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3404@cindex common allocation in linker script
3405This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3406to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3407output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3408
4818e05f
AM
3409@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3410@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3411@cindex common allocation in linker script
3412This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3413command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3414to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3415
53d25da6
AM
3416@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3417@kindex INSERT
3418@cindex insert user script into default script
3419This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3420augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3421inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3422@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3423default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3424sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3425linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3426insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3427linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3428default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3429of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3430to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3431is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3432
3433@smallexample
3434SECTIONS
3435@{
3436 OVERLAY :
3437 @{
3438 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3439 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3440 @}
3441@}
3442INSERT AFTER .text;
3443@end smallexample
3444
252b5132
RH
3445@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3446@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3447@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3448This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3449references among certain output sections.
3450
3451In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3452using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3453will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3454errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3455a function defined in the other section.
3456
3457The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3458@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3459an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3460@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3461names.
3462
3463@ifclear SingleFormat
3464@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3465@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3466@cindex machine architecture
3467@cindex architecture
3468Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3469of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3470architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3471the @samp{-f} option.
3472@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3473
3474@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3475@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3476This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3477@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3478in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3479@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3480@end table
3481
3482@node Assignments
3483@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3484@cindex assignment in scripts
3485@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3486@cindex variables, defining
3487You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3488the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3489
3490@menu
3491* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3492* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3493* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3494* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3495* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3496@end menu
3497
3498@node Simple Assignments
3499@subsection Simple Assignments
3500
3501You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3502
3503@table @code
3504@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3505@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3506@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3507@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3508@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3509@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3510@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3511@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3512@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3513@end table
3514
3515The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3516@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3517defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3518
3519The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3520may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3521
3522The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3523
3524Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3525
3526You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3527statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3528section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3529
3530The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3531expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3532
3533Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3534assignments may be used:
3535
3536@smallexample
3537floating_point = 0;
3538SECTIONS
3539@{
3540 .text :
3541 @{
3542 *(.text)
3543 _etext = .;
3544 @}
156e34dd 3545 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3546 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3547@}
3548@end smallexample
3549@noindent
3550In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3551zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3552the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3553defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3554upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3555
eb8476a6
MR
3556@node HIDDEN
3557@subsection HIDDEN
3558@cindex HIDDEN
3559For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3560exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3561
3562Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3563@code{HIDDEN}:
3564
3565@smallexample
3566HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3567SECTIONS
3568@{
3569 .text :
3570 @{
3571 *(.text)
3572 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3573 @}
3574 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3575 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3576@}
3577@end smallexample
3578@noindent
3579In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3580
252b5132
RH
3581@node PROVIDE
3582@subsection PROVIDE
3583@cindex PROVIDE
3584In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3585only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3586the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3587@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3588@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3589@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3590@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3591@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3592
3593Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3594@smallexample
3595SECTIONS
3596@{
3597 .text :
3598 @{
3599 *(.text)
3600 _etext = .;
3601 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3602 @}
3603@}
3604@end smallexample
3605
3606In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3607underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3608the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3609underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3610If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3611linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3612
7af8e998
L
3613@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3614@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3615@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3616Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3617hidden and won't be exported.
3618
73ae6183
NC
3619@node Source Code Reference
3620@subsection Source Code Reference
3621
3622Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3623intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3624a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3625symbol that does not have a value.
3626
3627Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3628transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3629stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3630prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3631mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3632of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3633variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3634linker script variable might be referred to as:
3635
3636@smallexample
3637 extern int foo;
3638@end smallexample
3639
3640But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3641
3642@smallexample
3643 _foo = 1000;
3644@end smallexample
3645
3646In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3647transformation has taken place.
3648
3649When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3650things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3651in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3652second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3653table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3654contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3655value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3656
3657@smallexample
3658 int foo = 1000;
3659@end smallexample
3660
10bf6894 3661creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
3662holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3663number 1000 is initially stored.
3664
3665When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3666first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3667memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3668So:
3669
3670@smallexample
3671 foo = 1;
3672@end smallexample
3673
3674looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3675associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3676address. Whereas:
3677
3678@smallexample
3679 int * a = & foo;
3680@end smallexample
3681
10bf6894 3682looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
3683and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3684the variable @samp{a}.
3685
3686Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3687the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3688an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3689
3690@smallexample
3691 foo = 1000;
3692@end smallexample
3693
3694creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3695the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3696address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3697linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3698access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3699
3700Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3701you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3702use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3703section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3704linker script contains these declarations:
3705
3706@smallexample
3707@group
3708 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3709 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3710 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3711@end group
3712@end smallexample
3713
3714Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3715
3716@smallexample
3717@group
3718 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3719
73ae6183
NC
3720 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3721@end group
3722@end smallexample
3723
3724Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3725
252b5132 3726@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3727@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3728@kindex SECTIONS
3729The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3730into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3731
3732The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3733@smallexample
3734SECTIONS
3735@{
3736 @var{sections-command}
3737 @var{sections-command}
3738 @dots{}
3739@}
3740@end smallexample
3741
3742Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3743
3744@itemize @bullet
3745@item
3746an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3747@item
3748a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3749@item
3750an output section description
3751@item
3752an overlay description
3753@end itemize
3754
3755The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3756@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3757those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3758understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3759the layout of the output file.
3760
3761Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3762below.
3763
3764If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3765linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3766section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3767input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3768example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3769in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3770
3771@menu
3772* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3773* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3774* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3775* Input Section:: Input section description
3776* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3777* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3778* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3779* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3780* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3781@end menu
3782
3783@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3784@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3785The full description of an output section looks like this:
3786@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3787@group
7e7d5768 3788@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 3789 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 3790 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
3791 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3792 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
3793 @{
3794 @var{output-section-command}
3795 @var{output-section-command}
3796 @dots{}
abc9061b 3797 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
3798@end group
3799@end smallexample
3800
3801Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3802
3803The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3804name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
3805The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
3806the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
3807The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3808
3809Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3810
3811@itemize @bullet
3812@item
3813a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3814@item
3815an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3816@item
3817data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3818@item
3819a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3820@end itemize
3821
3822@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3823@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3824@cindex name, section
3825@cindex section name
3826The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3827meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3828support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3829must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3830example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3831output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3832names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3833quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3834characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3835commas must be quoted.
3836
3837The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3838Discarding}.
3839
3840@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3841@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3842@cindex address, section
3843@cindex section address
3844The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
3845address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3846is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3847
3848If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3849section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3850to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3851alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3852contained within the output section.
3853
3854The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3855
3856@itemize @bullet
3857@item
3858If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
3859is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
3860in that region.
3861
3862@item
3863If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3864regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
3865section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
3866be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
3867
3868@item
3869If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
3870the output address will be based on the current value of the location
3871counter.
3872@end itemize
3873
3874@noindent
3875For example:
3876
252b5132
RH
3877@smallexample
3878.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3879@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3880
252b5132
RH
3881@noindent
3882and
ea5cae92 3883
252b5132
RH
3884@smallexample
3885.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3886@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3887
252b5132
RH
3888@noindent
3889are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3890@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3891counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
3892counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
3893input sections.
252b5132
RH
3894
3895The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3896For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3897so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3898do something like this:
3899@smallexample
3900.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3901@end smallexample
3902@noindent
3903This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3904aligned upward to the specified value.
3905
3906Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
3907location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3908sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
3909
3910@node Input Section
36f63dca 3911@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3912@cindex input sections
3913@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3914The most common output section command is an input section description.
3915
3916The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3917You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3918in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3919map the input files into your memory layout.
3920
3921@menu
3922* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3923* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3924* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3925* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3926* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3927@end menu
3928
3929@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3930@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3931@cindex input section basics
3932An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3933by a list of section names in parentheses.
3934
3935The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3936describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3937
3938The most common input section description is to include all input
3939sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3940include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3941@smallexample
3942*(.text)
3943@end smallexample
3944@noindent
18625d54
CM
3945Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3946of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3947match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3948example:
252b5132 3949@smallexample
b4346c09 3950*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 3951@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
3952will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3953@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
3954
3955There are two ways to include more than one section:
3956@smallexample
3957*(.text .rdata)
3958*(.text) *(.rdata)
3959@end smallexample
3960@noindent
3961The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3962@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
3963first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3964they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
3965@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3966@samp{.rdata} input sections.
3967
3968You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3969You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3970needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3971@smallexample
3972data.o(.data)
3973@end smallexample
3974
ae17ab41
CM
3975To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
3976of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
3977
3978Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
3979
3980@smallexample
3981@group
3982SECTIONS @{
3983 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
3984 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
3985@}
3986@end group
3987@end smallexample
3988
3989In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
3990input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
3991@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
3992@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
3993whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
3994
967928e9
AM
3995You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3996matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3997with no whitespace around the colon.
3998
3999@table @samp
4000@item archive:file
4001matches file within archive
4002@item archive:
4003matches the whole archive
4004@item :file
4005matches file but not one in an archive
4006@end table
4007
4008Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4009wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4010single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4011@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4012within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4013also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4014other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4015from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4016command.
4017
252b5132
RH
4018If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4019the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4020commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4021@smallexample
4022data.o
4023@end smallexample
4024
967928e9
AM
4025When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4026and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4027characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4028name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4029did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4030though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4031@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4032the archive search path.
4033
4034@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4035@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4036@cindex input section wildcards
4037@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4038@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4039@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4040In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4041name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4042
4043The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4044pattern for the file name.
4045
4046The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4047
4048@table @samp
4049@item *
4050matches any number of characters
4051@item ?
4052matches any single character
4053@item [@var{chars}]
4054matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4055character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4056@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4057@item \
4058quotes the following character
4059@end table
4060
4061When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4062will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4063Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4064exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4065@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4066a @samp{/} character.
4067
4068File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4069specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4070does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4071
4072If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4073appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4074will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4075sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4076@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4077@smallexample
4078.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4079.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4080@end smallexample
4081
bcaa7b3e 4082@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4083Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4084in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4085this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4086pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4087@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4088into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4089
bcaa7b3e
L
4090@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4091@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4092difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4093descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4094Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4095reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4096
02ecc8e9
L
4097@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4098@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4099difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4100ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4101encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4102
bcaa7b3e
L
4103@cindex SORT
4104@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4105
4106When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4107can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4108
4109@enumerate
4110@item
4111@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4112It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4113sections have the same name.
4114@item
4115@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4116It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4117sections have the same alignment.
4118@item
c0065db7 4119@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4120treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4121@item
4122@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4123is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4124@item
4125All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4126@end enumerate
4127
4128When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4129section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4130takes precedence over the command line option.
4131
4132If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4133command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4134treated as nested sorting command.
4135
4136@enumerate
4137@item
4138@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4139@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4140@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4141@item
4142@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4143@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4144@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4145@end enumerate
4146
4147If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4148command line option will be ignored.
4149
eda680f8
L
4150@cindex SORT_NONE
4151@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4152section sorting option.
4153
252b5132
RH
4154If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4155@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4156precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4157
4158This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4159files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4160sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4161The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4162with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4163linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4164@smallexample
4165@group
4166SECTIONS @{
4167 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4168 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4169 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4170 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4171@}
4172@end group
4173@end smallexample
4174
4175@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4176@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4177@cindex common symbol placement
4178@cindex uninitialized data placement
4179A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4180file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4181linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4182named @samp{COMMON}.
4183
4184You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4185other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4186particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4187input files are placed in another section.
4188
4189In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4190@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4191@smallexample
4192.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4193@end smallexample
4194
4195@cindex scommon section
4196@cindex small common symbols
4197Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4198example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4199symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4200different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4201the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4202symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4203to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4204locations.
4205
4206@cindex [COMMON]
4207You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4208notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4209@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4210
4211@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4212@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4213@cindex KEEP
4214@cindex garbage collection
4215When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4216it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4217This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4218with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4219@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4220
4221@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4222@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4223The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4224to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4225start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4226@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4227follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4228@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4229@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4230All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4231files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4232
4233@smallexample
4234@group
4235SECTIONS @{
4236 outputa 0x10000 :
4237 @{
4238 all.o
4239 foo.o (.input1)
4240 @}
36f63dca
NC
4241@end group
4242@group
252b5132
RH
4243 outputb :
4244 @{
4245 foo.o (.input2)
4246 foo1.o (.input1)
4247 @}
36f63dca
NC
4248@end group
4249@group
252b5132
RH
4250 outputc :
4251 @{
4252 *(.input1)
4253 *(.input2)
4254 @}
4255@}
4256@end group
a1ab1d2a 4257@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4258
4259@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4260@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4261@cindex data
4262@cindex section data
4263@cindex output section data
4264@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4265@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4266@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4267@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4268@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4269You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4270@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4271an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4272parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4273value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4274counter.
4275
4276The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4277store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4278bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4279stored.
4280
4281For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4282of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4283@smallexample
4284BYTE(1)
4285LONG(addr)
4286@end smallexample
4287
4288When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4289same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4290target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4291@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4292@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4293
4294If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4295which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4296When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4297true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4298endianness of the first input object file.
4299
36f63dca 4300Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4301between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4302@smallexample
4303SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4304@end smallexample
4305whereas this will work:
4306@smallexample
4307SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4308@end smallexample
4309
252b5132
RH
4310@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4311@cindex holes, filling
4312@cindex unspecified memory
4313You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4314current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4315otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4316gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4317with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4318necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4319point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4320than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4321different parts of an output section.
4322
4323This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4324value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4325@smallexample
563e308f 4326FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4327@end smallexample
4328
4329The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4330section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4331part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4332entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4333precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4334expression.
252b5132
RH
4335
4336@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4337@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4338There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4339commands.
4340
4341@table @code
4342@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4343@cindex input filename symbols
4344@cindex filename symbols
4345@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4346The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4347The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4348file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4349the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4350
4351This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4352normally used for any other object file format.
4353
4354@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4355@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4356@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4357@item CONSTRUCTORS
4358When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4359unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4360destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4361arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4362automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4363For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4364linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4365@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4366ignored for other object file formats.
4367
4368The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4369constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4370Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4371the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4372first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4373of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4374compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4375formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4376@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4377the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4378destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4379@code{exit}.
4380
4381For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4382arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4383addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4384and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4385linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4386runtime code expects to see.
4387
4388@smallexample
4389 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4390 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4391 *(.ctors)
4392 LONG(0)
4393 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4394 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4395 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4396 *(.dtors)
4397 LONG(0)
4398 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4399@end smallexample
4400
4401If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4402which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4403are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4404are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4405command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4406@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4407@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4408@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4409
4410Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4411and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4412need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4413scripts.
4414
4415@end table
4416
4417@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4418@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4419@cindex discarding sections
4420@cindex sections, discarding
4421@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4422The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4423This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4424may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4425@smallexample
49c13adb 4426.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4427@end smallexample
4428@noindent
4429will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4430@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4431sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4432space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4433too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4434space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4435@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4436@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4437This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4438
a0976ea4 4439The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4440on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4441symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4442the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4443section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4444
4445@cindex /DISCARD/
4446The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4447input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4448section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4449
4450@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4451@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4452@cindex output section attributes
4453We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4454like this:
0c71d759 4455
252b5132 4456@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4457@group
7e7d5768 4458@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4459 [AT(@var{lma})]
4460 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4461 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4462 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4463 @{
4464 @var{output-section-command}
4465 @var{output-section-command}
4466 @dots{}
562d3460 4467 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4468@end group
4469@end smallexample
0c71d759 4470
252b5132
RH
4471We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4472@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4473remaining section attributes.
4474
a1ab1d2a 4475@menu
252b5132
RH
4476* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4477* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4478* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4479* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4480* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4481* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4482* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4483* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4484@end menu
4485
4486@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4487@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4488Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4489parentheses. The following types are defined:
4490
4491@table @code
4492@item NOLOAD
4493The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4494loaded into memory when the program is run.
4495@item DSECT
4496@itemx COPY
4497@itemx INFO
4498@itemx OVERLAY
4499These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4500rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4501marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4502section when the program is run.
4503@end table
4504
4505@kindex NOLOAD
4506@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4507@cindex loading, preventing
4508The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4509the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4510the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4511@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4512need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4513@smallexample
4514@group
4515SECTIONS @{
4516 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4517 @dots{}
4518@}
4519@end group
4520@end smallexample
4521
4522@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4523@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4524@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4525@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4526@cindex load address
4527@cindex section load address
4528Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4529@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4530@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4531specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4532address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4533
ea5cae92
NC
4534The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4535specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4536takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4537load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4538region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4539
4540If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4541section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4542load address:
4543
4544@itemize @bullet
4545@item
4546If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4547the LMA address as well.
4548
4549@item
4550If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4551
4552@item
4553Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4554with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4555section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4556VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4557the last section in the located region.
4558
4559@item
4560If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4561that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4562
4563@item
4564If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4565section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4566@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4567
4568@cindex ROM initialized data
4569@cindex initialized data in ROM
4570This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4571example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4572called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4573@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4574even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4575uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4576defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4577counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4578
4579@smallexample
4580@group
4581SECTIONS
4582 @{
4583 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4584 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4585 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4586 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4587 .bss 0x3000 :
4588 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4589@}
4590@end group
4591@end smallexample
4592
4593The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4594this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4595the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4596how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4597script.
4598
4599@smallexample
4600@group
4601extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4602char *src = &_etext;
4603char *dst = &_data;
4604
ea5cae92
NC
4605/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4606while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4607 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4608
ea5cae92 4609/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4610for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4611 *dst = 0;
4612@end group
4613@end smallexample
4614
bbf115d3
L
4615@node Forced Output Alignment
4616@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4617@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4618@cindex forcing output section alignment
4619@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 4620You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
4621alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
4622intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 4623
7e7d5768
AM
4624@node Forced Input Alignment
4625@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4626@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4627@cindex forcing input section alignment
4628@cindex input section alignment
4629You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4630SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4631sections, whether larger or smaller.
4632
0c71d759
NC
4633@node Output Section Constraint
4634@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4635@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4636@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4637@cindex constraints on output sections
4638You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4639of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4640read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4641@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4642
252b5132 4643@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4644@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4645@kindex >@var{region}
4646@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4647@cindex memory regions and sections
4648You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4649using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4650
4651Here is a simple example:
4652@smallexample
4653@group
4654MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4655SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4656@end group
4657@end smallexample
4658
4659@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4660@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4661@kindex :@var{phdr}
4662@cindex section, assigning to program header
4663@cindex program headers and sections
4664You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4665using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4666one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4667assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4668@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4669linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4670
4671Here is a simple example:
4672@smallexample
4673@group
4674PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4675SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4676@end group
4677@end smallexample
4678
4679@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4680@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4681@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4682@cindex section fill pattern
4683@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4684You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4685@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4686(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4687within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4688alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4689necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4690of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4691an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4692fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4693other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4694pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4695expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4696
4697You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4698output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4699
4700Here is a simple example:
4701@smallexample
4702@group
563e308f 4703SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4704@end group
4705@end smallexample
4706
4707@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4708@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4709@kindex OVERLAY
4710@cindex overlays
4711An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4712are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4713the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4714copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4715required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4716can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4717than another.
4718
4719Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4720@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4721output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4722command is as follows:
4723@smallexample
4724@group
4725OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4726 @{
4727 @var{secname1}
4728 @{
4729 @var{output-section-command}
4730 @var{output-section-command}
4731 @dots{}
4732 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4733 @var{secname2}
4734 @{
4735 @var{output-section-command}
4736 @var{output-section-command}
4737 @dots{}
4738 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4739 @dots{}
abc9061b 4740 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4741@end group
4742@end smallexample
4743
4744Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4745section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4746section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 4747those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
4748except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4749sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4750
abc9061b
CC
4751The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
4752the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4753
252b5132
RH
4754The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4755addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4756memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4757whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4758and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4759and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4760
56dd11f0
NC
4761If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
4762references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
4763the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
4764sense for one section to refer directly to another.
4765@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
4766
4767For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4768provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4769defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4770@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4771the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4772within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4773symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4774
4775At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4776the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4777
4778Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4779@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4780@smallexample
4781@group
4782 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4783 @{
4784 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4785 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4786 @}
4787@end group
4788@end smallexample
4789@noindent
4790This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4791address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4792@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4793following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4794@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4795@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4796
4797C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4798like the following.
4799
4800@smallexample
4801@group
4802 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4803 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4804 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4805@end group
4806@end smallexample
4807
4808Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4809everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4810example could have been written identically as follows.
4811
4812@smallexample
4813@group
4814 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4815 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4816 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4817 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4818 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4819 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4820 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4821@end group
4822@end smallexample
4823
4824@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4825@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4826@kindex MEMORY
4827@cindex memory regions
4828@cindex regions of memory
4829@cindex allocating memory
4830@cindex discontinuous memory
4831The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4832memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4833
4834The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4835memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4836may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4837can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4838set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4839regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4840around to fit into the available regions.
4841
4842A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4843command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4844you wish. The syntax is:
4845@smallexample
4846@group
a1ab1d2a 4847MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4848 @{
4849 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4850 @dots{}
4851 @}
4852@end group
4853@end smallexample
4854
4855The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4856region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4857Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4858with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
4859must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4860add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 4861command.
252b5132
RH
4862
4863@cindex memory region attributes
4864The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4865whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4866not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4867@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4868section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4869the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4870them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4871
4872The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4873@table @samp
4874@item R
4875Read-only section
4876@item W
4877Read/write section
4878@item X
4879Executable section
4880@item A
4881Allocatable section
4882@item I
4883Initialized section
4884@item L
4885Same as @samp{I}
4886@item !
c09e9a8c 4887Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
4888@end table
4889
4890If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4891@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4892attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4893in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4894attributes.
4895
4896@kindex ORIGIN =
4897@kindex o =
4898@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4899The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4900the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4901cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4902abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4903@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4904
4905@kindex LENGTH =
4906@kindex len =
4907@kindex l =
4908The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4909region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4910be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4911@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4912
4913In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4914available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4915and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4916linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4917is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4918or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4919explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4920region.
4921
4922@smallexample
4923@group
a1ab1d2a 4924MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4925 @{
4926 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4927 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4928 @}
4929@end group
4930@end smallexample
4931
4932Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4933specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4934@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4935a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4936output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4937was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4938the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4939output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4940region, the linker will issue an error message.
4941
3ec57632 4942It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 4943expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
4944@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4945
4946@smallexample
4947@group
c0065db7 4948 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
4949@end group
4950@end smallexample
4951
252b5132
RH
4952@node PHDRS
4953@section PHDRS Command
4954@kindex PHDRS
4955@cindex program headers
4956@cindex ELF program headers
4957@cindex program segments
4958@cindex segments, ELF
4959The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4960@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4961loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4962program with the @samp{-p} option.
4963
4964When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4965reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4966program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4967This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4968interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4969
4970The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4971in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4972precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4973the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4974not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4975
4976The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4977generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4978ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4979
4980This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4981@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4982
4983@smallexample
4984@group
4985PHDRS
4986@{
4987 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4988 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4989@}
4990@end group
4991@end smallexample
4992
4993The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4994of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4995header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4996with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
4997must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
4998is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
4999
5000Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5001system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5002specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5003sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5004attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5005Section Phdr}.
5006
5007It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5008merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5009repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5010contain the section.
5011
5012If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5013then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5014not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5015convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5016placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5017default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5018segment at all.
5019
5020@kindex FILEHDR
5021@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5022You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5023the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5024The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5025file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5026include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5027segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5028these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5029
5030The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5031value of the keyword.
5032
5033@table @asis
5034@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5035Indicates an unused program header.
5036
5037@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5038Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5039the file.
5040
5041@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5042Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5043
5044@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5045Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5046found.
5047
5048@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5049Indicates a segment holding note information.
5050
5051@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5052A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5053ABI.
5054
5055@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5056Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5057
5058@item @var{expression}
5059An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5060be used for types not defined above.
5061@end table
5062
5063You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5064in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5065@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5066Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5067output section attribute.
5068
5069The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5070which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5071explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5072an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5073header.
5074
5075Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5076headers used on a native ELF system.
5077
5078@example
5079@group
5080PHDRS
5081@{
5082 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5083 interp PT_INTERP ;
5084 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5085 data PT_LOAD ;
5086 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5087@}
5088
5089SECTIONS
5090@{
5091 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5092 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5093 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5094 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5095 @dots{}
5096 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5097 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5098 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5099 @dots{}
5100@}
5101@end group
5102@end example
5103
5104@node VERSION
5105@section VERSION Command
5106@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5107@cindex symbol versions
5108@cindex version script
5109@cindex versions of symbols
5110The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5111only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5112symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5113a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5114shared library.
5115
5116You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5117you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5118also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5119
5120The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5121@smallexample
5122VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5123@end smallexample
5124
5125The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5126Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5127version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5128version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5129version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5130scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5131library.
5132
5133The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5134examples.
5135
5136@smallexample
5137VERS_1.1 @{
5138 global:
5139 foo1;
5140 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5141 old*;
5142 original*;
5143 new*;
252b5132
RH
5144@};
5145
5146VERS_1.2 @{
5147 foo2;
5148@} VERS_1.1;
5149
5150VERS_2.0 @{
5151 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5152 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5153 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5154 "f(int, double)";
5155 @};
252b5132
RH
5156@} VERS_1.2;
5157@end smallexample
5158
5159This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5160version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5161The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5162a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5163of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5164symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5165is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5166in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5167However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5168name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5169
5170Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5171depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5172to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5173
5174Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5175depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5176and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5177
5178When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5179specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5180unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5181unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5182somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5183wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5184wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5185set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5186ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5187
5188The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5189they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5190could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5191However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5192
0f6bf451 5193Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5194in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5195symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5196won't.
5197
5198@smallexample
7c9c73be 5199@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5200@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5201
252b5132
RH
5202When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5203symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5204requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5205shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5206loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5207linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5208application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5209way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5210all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5211search for each symbol reference.
5212
5213The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5214doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5215that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5216functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5217the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5218required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5219that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5220versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5221the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5222
5223There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5224first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5225source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5226script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5227maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5228@smallexample
5229__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5230@end smallexample
5231@noindent
5232in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5233be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5234The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5235@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5236takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5237
5238The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5239function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5240an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5241version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5242linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5243
5244To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5245source file. Here is an example:
5246
5247@smallexample
5248__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5249__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5250__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5251__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5252@end smallexample
5253
5254In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5255unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5256example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5257@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5258
5259When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5260some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5261this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5262@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5263declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5264you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5265
5266If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5267within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5268(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5269specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5270
cb840a31
L
5271You can also specify the language in the version script:
5272
5273@smallexample
5274VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5275@end smallexample
5276
c0065db7 5277The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5278The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5279demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5280patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5281@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5282
86043bbb
MM
5283Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5284described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5285or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5286the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5287whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5288cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5289might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5290should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5291expect when you upgrade.
5292
252b5132
RH
5293@node Expressions
5294@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5295@cindex expressions
5296@cindex arithmetic
5297The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5298that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5299expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5300host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5301
5302You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5303
5304The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5305expressions.
5306
5307@menu
5308* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5309* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5310* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5311* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5312* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5313* Operators:: Operators
5314* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5315* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5316* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5317@end menu
5318
5319@node Constants
5320@subsection Constants
5321@cindex integer notation
5322@cindex constants in linker scripts
5323All constants are integers.
5324
5325As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5326octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5327hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5328@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5329@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5330value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5331
5332@cindex scaled integers
5333@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5334@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5335@cindex suffixes for integers
5336@cindex integer suffixes
5337In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5338constant by
5339@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5340@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5341@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5342@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5343@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5344@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5345@tex
5346${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5347@end tex
5348@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5349respectively. For example, the following
5350all refer to the same quantity:
5351
252b5132 5352@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5353_fourk_1 = 4K;
5354_fourk_2 = 4096;
5355_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5356_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5357@end smallexample
5358
8a308ae8
NC
5359Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5360conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5361
0c71d759
NC
5362@node Symbolic Constants
5363@subsection Symbolic Constants
5364@cindex symbolic constants
5365@kindex CONSTANT
5366It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5367the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5368
5369@table @code
5370@item MAXPAGESIZE
5371@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5372The target's maximum page size.
5373
5374@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5375@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5376The target's default page size.
5377@end table
5378
5379So for example:
5380
5381@smallexample
9d5777a3 5382 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5383@end smallexample
5384
5385will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5386supported by the target.
5387
252b5132
RH
5388@node Symbols
5389@subsection Symbol Names
5390@cindex symbol names
5391@cindex names
5392@cindex quoted symbol names
5393@kindex "
5394Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5395and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5396Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5397specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5398keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5399@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5400"SECTION" = 9;
5401"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5402@end smallexample
5403
5404Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5405to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5406whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5407
ecca9871
L
5408@node Orphan Sections
5409@subsection Orphan Sections
5410@cindex orphan
5411Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5412are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5413script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5414output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5415placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5416attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5417same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5418If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5419at the end of the file.
5420
5421For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5422well as section flag.
5423
41911f68 5424If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5425the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
9aec8434 5426__start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
41911f68
NC
5427section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5428orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5429representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5430character.
5431
252b5132
RH
5432@node Location Counter
5433@subsection The Location Counter
5434@kindex .
5435@cindex dot
5436@cindex location counter
5437@cindex current output location
5438The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5439current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5440location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5441within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5442anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5443
5444@cindex holes
5445Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5446moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5447location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5448and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5449doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5450
5451@smallexample
5452SECTIONS
5453@{
5454 output :
5455 @{
5456 file1(.text)
5457 . = . + 1000;
5458 file2(.text)
5459 . += 1000;
5460 file3(.text)
563e308f 5461 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5462@}
5463@end smallexample
5464@noindent
5465In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5466located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5467followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5468@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5469@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5470specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5471
5c6bbab8
NC
5472@cindex dot inside sections
5473Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5474current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5475statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5476absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5477however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5478not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5479
5480@smallexample
5481SECTIONS
5482@{
5483 . = 0x100
5484 .text: @{
5485 *(.text)
5486 . = 0x200
5487 @}
5488 . = 0x500
5489 .data: @{
5490 *(.data)
5491 . += 0x600
5492 @}
5493@}
5494@end smallexample
5495
5496The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5497and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5498the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5499much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5500move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5501and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5502the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5503the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5504
b5666f2f
AM
5505@cindex dot outside sections
5506Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5507output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5508needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5509
5510@smallexample
5511SECTIONS
5512@{
5513 start_of_text = . ;
5514 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5515 end_of_text = . ;
5516
5517 start_of_data = . ;
5518 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5519 end_of_data = . ;
5520@}
5521@end smallexample
5522
5523If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5524not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5525between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5526should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5527blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5528the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5529sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5530statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5531special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5532place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5533as follows:
5534
5535@smallexample
5536SECTIONS
5537@{
5538 start_of_text = . ;
5539 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5540 end_of_text = . ;
5541
5542 start_of_data = . ;
5543 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5544 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5545 end_of_data = . ;
5546@}
5547@end smallexample
5548
5549This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5550@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5551placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5552assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5553a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5554section. So you could write:
5555
5556@smallexample
5557SECTIONS
5558@{
5559 start_of_text = . ;
5560 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5561 end_of_text = . ;
5562
5563 . = . ;
5564 start_of_data = . ;
5565 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5566 end_of_data = . ;
5567@}
5568@end smallexample
5569
5570Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5571@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5572
252b5132
RH
5573@need 2000
5574@node Operators
5575@subsection Operators
5576@cindex operators for arithmetic
5577@cindex arithmetic operators
5578@cindex precedence in expressions
5579The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5580the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5581@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5582@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5583@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5584@smallexample
5585precedence associativity Operators Notes
5586(highest)
55871 left ! - ~ (1)
55882 left * / %
55893 left + -
55904 left >> <<
55915 left == != > < <= >=
55926 left &
55937 left |
55948 left &&
55959 left ||
559610 right ? :
559711 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5598(lowest)
5599@end smallexample
5600Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5601(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5602(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5603@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5604@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5605@tex
5606\vskip \baselineskip
5607%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5608\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5609\hrule
5610\halign
5611{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5612height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5613&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5614height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5615\noalign{\hrule}
5616height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5617&highest&&&&&\cr
5618% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5619&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5620&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5621&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5622&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5623&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5624&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5625&7&&left&&|&\cr
5626&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5627&9&&left&&||&\cr
5628&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5629&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5630&lowest&&&&&\cr
5631height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5632\hrule}
5633@end tex
5634@iftex
5635{
5636@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5637@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5638@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5639}
5640@end iftex
5641@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5642
5643@node Evaluation
5644@subsection Evaluation
5645@cindex lazy evaluation
5646@cindex expression evaluation order
5647The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5648an expression when absolutely necessary.
5649
5650The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5651address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5652regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5653as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5654
5655However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5656until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5657other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5658for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5659
5660The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5661assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5662allocation.
5663
5664Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5665@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5666
5667If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5668available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5669following
5670@smallexample
5671@group
5672SECTIONS
5673 @{
a1ab1d2a 5674 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5675 @{ *(.text) @}
5676 @}
5677@end group
5678@end smallexample
5679@noindent
5680will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5681address}.
5682
5683@node Expression Section
5684@subsection The Section of an Expression
5685@cindex expression sections
5686@cindex absolute expressions
5687@cindex relative expressions
5688@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5689@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5690@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
5691Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5692relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5693using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5694value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5695symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5696operations.
5697
abf4be64
AM
5698Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5699section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5700address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5701@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5702functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
5703One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5704(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
5705differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5706versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5707section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5708Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
5709absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5710given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5711everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
5712
5713In the following simple example,
252b5132 5714
7542af2a
AM
5715@smallexample
5716@group
5717SECTIONS
5718 @{
5719 . = 0x100;
5720 __executable_start = 0x100;
5721 .data :
5722 @{
5723 . = 0x10;
5724 __data_start = 0x10;
5725 *(.data)
5726 @}
5727 @dots{}
5728 @}
5729@end group
5730@end smallexample
252b5132 5731
7542af2a
AM
5732both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5733address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5734@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5735section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 5736
5c3049d2
AM
5737For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5738addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
5739
5740@itemize @bullet
5741@item
c05f749e
AM
5742Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
5743operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
5744absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
5745@item
7542af2a
AM
5746Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5747relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5748and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5749@item
c05f749e
AM
5750Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
5751in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
5752address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
5753before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
5754@end itemize
5755
5756The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5757
5758@itemize @bullet
5759@item
5760An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5761@item
5762The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5763@item
9bc8bb33 5764The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 5765relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
9bc8bb33
AM
5766(after above conversions) is also a number.
5767@item
5768The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5769relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5770section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
5771@item
5772The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5773conversions) is an absolute address.
5774@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5775
5776You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5777to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5778create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5779section @samp{.data}:
5780@smallexample
5781SECTIONS
5782 @{
5783 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5784 @}
5785@end smallexample
5786@noindent
5787If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5788@samp{.data} section.
5789
7542af2a
AM
5790Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5791particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5792
252b5132
RH
5793@node Builtin Functions
5794@subsection Builtin Functions
5795@cindex functions in expressions
5796The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5797use in linker script expressions.
5798
5799@table @code
5800@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5801@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5802@cindex expression, absolute
5803Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5804of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5805value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5806normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5807
5808@item ADDR(@var{section})
5809@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5810@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 5811Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 5812script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
5813the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5814@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5815@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5816the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
5817@smallexample
5818@group
5819SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5820 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5821 @{
252b5132
RH
5822 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5823 @dots{}
5824 @}
5825 .output :
5826 @{
5827 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5828 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5829 @}
5830@dots{} @}
5831@end group
5832@end smallexample
5833
876f4090
NS
5834@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5835@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5836@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5837@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5838@cindex round up location counter
5839@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5840@cindex round up expression
5841@cindex align expression
5842Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5843to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5844doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5845arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5846expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5847equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5848
5849Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5850next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5851variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5852input sections:
252b5132
RH
5853@smallexample
5854@group
5855SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5856 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5857 *(.data)
5858 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5859 @}
5860@dots{} @}
5861@end group
5862@end smallexample
5863@noindent
5864The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5865a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5866a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5867of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5868
5869The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5870
362c1d1a
NS
5871@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5872@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5873@cindex section alignment
5874Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5875been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5876evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5877the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5878value in that section.
5879@smallexample
5880@group
5881SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5882 .output @{
5883 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5884 @dots{}
5885 @}
5886@dots{} @}
5887@end group
5888@end smallexample
5889
252b5132
RH
5890@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5891@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5892This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5893scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5894section.
5895
2d20f7bf
JJ
5896@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5897@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5898This is equivalent to either
5899@smallexample
5900(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5901@end smallexample
5902or
5903@smallexample
5904(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5905@end smallexample
5906@noindent
5907depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5908for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5909@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5910If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5911memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5912bytes in the on-disk file.
5913
5914This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5915any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5916@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5917be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5918working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5919
5920@noindent
5921Example:
5922@smallexample
5923 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5924@end smallexample
5925
5926@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5927@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5928This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5929evaluation purposes.
5930
5931@smallexample
5932 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5933@end smallexample
5934
a4f5ad88
JJ
5935@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5936@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5937This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 5938@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
5939When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5940does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5941@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5942boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5943it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
5944@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
5945padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
5946section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
5947
5948@smallexample
5949 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5950@end smallexample
5951
252b5132
RH
5952@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5953@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5954@cindex symbol defaults
5955Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
5956defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5957return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
5958default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5959shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5960the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5961existed, its value is preserved:
5962
5963@smallexample
5964@group
5965SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5966 .text : @{
5967 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5968 @dots{}
5969 @}
5970 @dots{}
5971@}
5972@end group
5973@end smallexample
5974
3ec57632
NC
5975@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5976@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5977Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5978
252b5132
RH
5979@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5980@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5981@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 5982Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
5983Section LMA}).
5984
2e53f7d6
NC
5985@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
5986@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
5987Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
5988@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
5989
252b5132
RH
5990@kindex MAX
5991@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5992Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5993
5994@kindex MIN
5995@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5996Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5997
5998@item NEXT(@var{exp})
5999@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6000@cindex unallocated address, next
6001Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6002This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6003use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6004output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6005
3ec57632
NC
6006@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6007@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6008Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6009
ba916c8a
MM
6010@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6011@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6012Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6013value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6014@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6015will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6016can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6017``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6018name.
6019
252b5132
RH
6020@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6021@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6022@cindex section size
6023Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6024been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6025evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6026@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6027@smallexample
6028@group
6029SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6030 .output @{
6031 .start = . ;
6032 @dots{}
6033 .end = . ;
6034 @}
6035 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6036 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6037@dots{} @}
6038@end group
6039@end smallexample
6040
6041@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6042@itemx sizeof_headers
6043@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6044@cindex header size
6045Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6046information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6047this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6048choose, to facilitate paging.
6049
6050@cindex not enough room for program headers
6051@cindex program headers, not enough room
6052When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6053@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6054number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6055addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6056additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6057room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6058the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6059script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6060you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6061command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6062@end table
6063
6064@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6065@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6066@cindex implicit linker scripts
6067If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6068an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6069linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6070linker will report an error.
6071
6072An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6073
6074Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6075assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6076commands.
6077
6078Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6079at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6080read. This can affect archive searching.
6081
6082@ifset GENERIC
6083@node Machine Dependent
6084@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6085
6086@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6087@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6088sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6089functionality are not listed.
6090
6091@menu
36f63dca
NC
6092@ifset H8300
6093* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6094@end ifset
6095@ifset I960
6096* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6097@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6098@ifset M68HC11
6099* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6100@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6101@ifset ARM
6102* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6103@end ifset
6104@ifset HPPA
6105* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6106@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6107@ifset M68K
6108* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6109@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6110@ifset MIPS
6111* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6112@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6113@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6114* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6115@end ifset
2469cfa2 6116@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6117* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6118@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6119@ifset NDS32
6120* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6121@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6122@ifset NIOSII
6123* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6124@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6125@ifset POWERPC
6126* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6127@end ifset
6128@ifset POWERPC64
6129* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6130@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6131@ifset SPU
6132* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6133@end ifset
74459f0e 6134@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6135* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6136@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6137@ifset WIN32
6138* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6139@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6140@ifset XTENSA
6141* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6142@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6143@end menu
6144@end ifset
6145
252b5132
RH
6146@ifset H8300
6147@ifclear GENERIC
6148@raisesections
6149@end ifclear
6150
6151@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6152@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6153
6154@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6155For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6156you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6157
6158@table @emph
6159@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6160@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6161@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6162targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6163program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6164respectively.
6165
6166@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6167@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6168@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6169@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6170sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6171page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6172(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6173@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6174top page of memory).
1502569c 6175
81f5558e
NC
6176@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6177indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6178displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6179the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6180@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6181whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6182range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6183
1502569c 6184@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6185@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6186biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6187which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6188page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6189(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6190@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6191the top page of memory).
6192
6193@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6194@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
619532 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6196changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6197(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6198@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6199the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6200@end table
6201
6202@ifclear GENERIC
6203@lowersections
6204@end ifclear
6205@end ifset
6206
36f63dca 6207@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6208@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6209@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6210@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6211@node Renesas
6212@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6213
c2dcd04e
NC
6214@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6215H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6216options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6217@end ifset
6218@end ifclear
6219
6220@ifset I960
6221@ifclear GENERIC
6222@raisesections
6223@end ifclear
6224
6225@node i960
6226@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6227
6228@cindex i960 support
6229
6230You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6231specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6232family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6233incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6234linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6235libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6236search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6237
6238For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6239well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6240paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6241the names
6242
6243@smallexample
6244@group
6245try
6246libtry.a
6247tryca
6248libtryca.a
6249@end group
6250@end smallexample
6251
6252@noindent
6253The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6254two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6255
6256You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6257the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6258use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6259specifies a library.
6260
6261@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6262@cindex relaxing on i960
6263@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6264you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6265@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6266them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6267instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6268instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6269target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6270not itself call any subroutines).
6271
6272@ifclear GENERIC
6273@lowersections
6274@end ifclear
6275@end ifset
6276
6277@ifset ARM
6278@ifclear GENERIC
6279@raisesections
6280@end ifclear
6281
93fd0973
SC
6282@ifset M68HC11
6283@ifclear GENERIC
6284@raisesections
6285@end ifclear
6286
6287@node M68HC11/68HC12
6288@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6289
6290@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6291
6292@subsection Linker Relaxation
6293
6294For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6295optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6296
6297@table @emph
6298@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6299@item relaxing address modes
6300@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6301targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6302program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6303respectively.
6304
6305@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6306transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6307page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6308
6309@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6310When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6311of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6312addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6313@code{bset} instructions.
6314
6315@end table
6316
6317@subsection Trampoline Generation
6318
6319@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6320@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6321For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6322call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6323will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6324trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6325case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6326point to the function trampoline.
6327
6328@ifclear GENERIC
6329@lowersections
6330@end ifclear
6331@end ifset
6332
36f63dca 6333@node ARM
3674e28a 6334@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6335
6336@cindex ARM interworking support
6337@kindex --support-old-code
6338For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6339between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6340been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6341line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6342libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6343option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6344given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6345which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6346the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6347non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6348
6349@cindex thumb entry point
6350@cindex entry point, thumb
6351@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6352The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6353@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6354But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6355branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6356executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6357
ce11ba6c
KT
6358@cindex PE import table prefixing
6359@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6360The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6361the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6362element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6363import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6364
e489d0ae
PB
6365@cindex BE8
6366@kindex --be8
6367The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6368executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
6369The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
6370
3674e28a
PB
6371@cindex TARGET1
6372@kindex --target1-rel
6373@kindex --target1-abs
6374The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6375@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6376or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6377and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6378
6379@cindex TARGET2
6380@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6381The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6382@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6383meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6384@table @samp
6385@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6386@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6387@item abs
6388@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6389@item got-rel
6390@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6391@end table
6392
319850b4
JB
6393@cindex FIX_V4BX
6394@kindex --fix-v4bx
6395The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6396specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6397interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6398also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6399
6400In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6401linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6402@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6403
6404In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6405relocations are ignored.
6406
845b51d6
PB
6407@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6408@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6409Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6410relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6411
6412@smallexample
6413TST rM, #1
6414MOVEQ PC, rM
6415BX Rn
6416@end smallexample
6417
6418This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6419and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6420condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6421
33bfe774
JB
6422@cindex USE_BLX
6423@kindex --use-blx
6424The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6425BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6426situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6427code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6428each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6429
6430This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6431specify it if you are using that target.
6432
c6dd86c6
JB
6433@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6434@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6435The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6436bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6437instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6438to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6439the support code can read the intended values.
6440
6441The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6442intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6443and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6444intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6445full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6446you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6447
6448If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6449enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6450@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6451mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6452vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6453@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6454
6455If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6456potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6457such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6458first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6459instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6460the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6461are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6462
2de70689
MGD
6463@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6464@kindex --fix-arm1176
6465@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6466The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6467in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6468are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6469unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6470
9d5777a3 6471Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6472Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6473http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6474
bf21ed78
MS
6475@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6476@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6477The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6478warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6479enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6480linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6481using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6482not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6483
6484@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6485@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6486The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6487warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6488@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6489linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6490using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6491
726150b7
NC
6492@cindex PIC_VENEER
6493@kindex --pic-veneer
6494The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6495ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6496is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6497@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6498
6499@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6500@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6501The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6502code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6503perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6504placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6505controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6506The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 6507duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
6508group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6509code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6510where they should be placed.
6511
6512The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6513@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6514placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6515branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6516placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6517value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6518exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6519A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6520linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6521from the input sections.
6522
6523The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6524@samp{N = +1}.
6525
1a51c1a4
NC
6526Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6527only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6528otherwise.
6529
1db37fe6
YG
6530@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6531@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6532@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6533The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6534
6535The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6536
6537@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6538@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6539@cindex Merging exidx entries
6540The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6541
6542@kindex --long-plt
6543@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6544The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6545which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6546entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6547
36f63dca
NC
6548@ifclear GENERIC
6549@lowersections
6550@end ifclear
6551@end ifset
6552
6553@ifset HPPA
6554@ifclear GENERIC
6555@raisesections
6556@end ifclear
6557
6558@node HPPA ELF32
6559@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6560@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6561@kindex --multi-subspace
6562When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6563import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6564The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6565stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6566multiple sub-spaces.
6567
6568@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6569@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6570Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6571stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6572@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6573sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6574a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6575the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6576conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6577prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6578A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6579branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6580@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6581@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6582detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6583positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6584
6585Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6586single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6587create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6588large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6589
6590@ifclear GENERIC
6591@lowersections
6592@end ifclear
6593@end ifset
6594
7fb9f789
NC
6595@ifset M68K
6596@ifclear GENERIC
6597@raisesections
6598@end ifclear
6599
6600@node M68K
6601@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6602
6603@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6604@kindex --got=@var{type}
6605The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6606The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6607@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6608the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6609@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6610entries only at non-negative offsets.
6611@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6612entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6613support such GOTs.
6614@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6615output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6616file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6617files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6618
6619@ifclear GENERIC
6620@lowersections
6621@end ifclear
6622@end ifset
6623
833794fc
MR
6624@ifset MIPS
6625@ifclear GENERIC
6626@raisesections
6627@end ifclear
6628
6629@node MIPS
6630@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6631
6632@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
6633@kindex --insn32
6634@kindex --no-insn32
6635The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
6636microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
6637in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
6638used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
6639or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
6640including 16-bit ones where possible.
6641
6642@ifclear GENERIC
6643@lowersections
6644@end ifclear
6645@end ifset
6646
36f63dca
NC
6647@ifset MMIX
6648@ifclear GENERIC
6649@raisesections
6650@end ifclear
6651
6652@node MMIX
6653@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6654For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6655@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6656understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6657can translate between the two formats.
6658
6659There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6660Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6661registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6662equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6663@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6664global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6665this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6666symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6667
7a2de473
HPN
6668Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6669@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6670The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6671of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6672
6673Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6674are left out from an mmo file.
6675
6676@ifclear GENERIC
6677@lowersections
6678@end ifclear
6679@end ifset
6680
6681@ifset MSP430
6682@ifclear GENERIC
6683@raisesections
6684@end ifclear
6685
6686@node MSP430
6687@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6688For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6689will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6690just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6691
6692@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6693The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6694
6695@table @code
6696@item @samp{.vectors}
6697Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6698
6699@item @samp{.bootloader}
6700Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6701in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6702
6703@item @samp{.infomem}
6704Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6705this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6706
c0065db7 6707@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6708This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6709in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6710
6711@item @samp{.noinit}
6712Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6713
c0065db7 6714The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6715@end table
6716
6717@ifclear GENERIC
6718@lowersections
6719@end ifclear
6720@end ifset
6721
35c08157
KLC
6722@ifset NDS32
6723@ifclear GENERIC
6724@raisesections
6725@end ifclear
6726
6727@node NDS32
6728@section @code{ld} and NDS32
6729@kindex relaxing on NDS32
6730For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
6731relaxes objects according to these options.
6732
6733@table @code
6734@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
6735Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
6736
6737@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
6738Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
6739
6740@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
6741Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
6742
6743@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
6744Export the EX9 table after linking.
6745
6746@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
6747Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
6748
6749@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
6750Update the existing EX9 table.
6751
6752@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
6753Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
6754
6755@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
6756Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
6757
6758@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
6759Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
6760
6761@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
6762Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
6763@end table
6764
6765@ifclear GENERIC
6766@lowersections
6767@end ifclear
6768@end ifset
6769
78058a5e
SL
6770@ifset NIOSII
6771@ifclear GENERIC
6772@raisesections
6773@end ifclear
6774
6775@node Nios II
6776@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6777@cindex Nios II call relaxation
6778@kindex --relax on Nios II
6779
6780Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
6781transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
6782which may result in @command{ld} giving
6783@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6784The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
6785trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
6786outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
6787trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
6788be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
6789larger than 256MB.
6790
6791The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
6792is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
6793@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
6794locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
6795source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
6796register as a temporary.
6797
6798Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
6799relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
6800option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
6801
6802@ifclear GENERIC
6803@lowersections
6804@end ifclear
6805@end ifset
6806
2a60a7a8
AM
6807@ifset POWERPC
6808@ifclear GENERIC
6809@raisesections
6810@end ifclear
6811
6812@node PowerPC ELF32
6813@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6814@cindex PowerPC long branches
6815@kindex --relax on PowerPC
6816Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6817displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6818@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6819@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6820the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6821section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
6822section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6823@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6824both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6825considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
6826
6827@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6828@table @option
6829@cindex PowerPC PLT
6830@kindex --bss-plt
6831@item --bss-plt
6832Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6833generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6834the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6835writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6836@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6837PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6838compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6839BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6840
016687f8
AM
6841@kindex --secure-plt
6842@item --secure-plt
6843@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6844@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6845when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6846layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6847style BSS PLT.
6848
2a60a7a8
AM
6849@cindex PowerPC GOT
6850@kindex --sdata-got
6851@item --sdata-got
6852The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6853sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6854@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6855section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6856@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6857@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6858@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6859@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6860PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6861pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6862GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6863really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6864
6865@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6866@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6867@item --emit-stub-syms
6868This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6869symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6870
6871@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6872@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6873@item --no-tls-optimize
6874PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6875sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6876disable the optimization.
6877@end table
6878
6879@ifclear GENERIC
6880@lowersections
6881@end ifclear
6882@end ifset
6883
6884@ifset POWERPC64
6885@ifclear GENERIC
6886@raisesections
6887@end ifclear
6888
6889@node PowerPC64 ELF64
6890@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6891
6892@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6893@table @option
6894@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6895@kindex --stub-group-size
6896@item --stub-group-size
6897Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6898by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6899@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6900sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6901a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6902the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6903conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6904prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6905A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6906branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6907@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6908@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6909detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6910positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6911
6912Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6913single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6914create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6915large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6916
6917@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6918@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6919@item --emit-stub-syms
6920This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6921symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6922
6923@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6924@kindex --dotsyms
6925@kindex --no-dotsyms
6926@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6927These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6928in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6929function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6930code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6931properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6932to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6933@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6934dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6935feature.
6936
6937@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6938@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6939@item --no-tls-optimize
6940PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6941sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6942disable the optimization.
6943
6944@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6945@kindex --no-opd-optimize
6946@item --no-opd-optimize
6947PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6948corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 6949the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
6950Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6951
6952@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6953@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6954@item --non-overlapping-opd
6955Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6956@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6957the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6958entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6959
6960@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6961@kindex --no-toc-optimize
6962@item --no-toc-optimize
6963PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6964entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6965reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6966marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6967marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6968relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6969unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6970reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6971discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6972reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6973code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6974optimization.
6975
6976@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6977@kindex --no-multi-toc
6978@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
6979If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
6980@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
6981where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
6982entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6983total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6984grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6985TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6986calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6987help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
698864K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6989Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
6990
6991@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
6992@kindex --no-toc-sort
6993@item --no-toc-sort
6994By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
6995happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
6996placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
6997with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
6998referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
6999@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7000results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7001off this feature.
7002
7003@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7004@kindex --plt-align
7005@kindex --no-plt-align
7006@item --plt-align
7007@itemx --no-plt-align
7008Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
7009aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7010boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. By default PLT call stubs
7011are packed tightly.
7012
7013@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7014@kindex --plt-static-chain
7015@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7016@item --plt-static-chain
7017@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7018Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7019chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7020chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7021
7022@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7023@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7024@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7025@item --plt-thread-safe
7026@itemx --no-thread-safe
7027With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7028lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7029another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7030order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7031memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7032barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7033looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7034seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7035default behaviour.
2a60a7a8
AM
7036@end table
7037
7038@ifclear GENERIC
7039@lowersections
7040@end ifclear
7041@end ifset
7042
49fa1e15
AM
7043@ifset SPU
7044@ifclear GENERIC
7045@raisesections
7046@end ifclear
7047
7048@node SPU ELF
7049@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7050
7051@cindex SPU ELF options
7052@table @option
7053
7054@cindex SPU plugins
7055@kindex --plugin
7056@item --plugin
7057This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7058
7059@cindex SPU overlays
7060@kindex --no-overlays
7061@item --no-overlays
7062Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7063regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7064@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7065turns off all this special overlay handling.
7066
7067@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7068@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7069@item --emit-stub-syms
7070This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7071symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7072
7073@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7074@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7075@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7076This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7077function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7078on calls to non-overlay regions.
7079
7080@cindex SPU local store size
7081@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7082@item --local-store=lo:hi
7083@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7084the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7085range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7086
c0065db7 7087@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7088@kindex --stack-analysis
7089@item --stack-analysis
7090SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7091unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7092under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7093@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7094@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7095determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7096for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7097for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7098for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7099find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7100and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7101under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7102dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7103is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7104and calls will be given.
7105
c0065db7 7106@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7107@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7108@item --emit-stack-syms
7109This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7110in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7111These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7112functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7113functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7114such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7115The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7116@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7117@end table
7118
7119@ifclear GENERIC
7120@lowersections
7121@end ifclear
7122@end ifset
7123
36f63dca
NC
7124@ifset TICOFF
7125@ifclear GENERIC
7126@raisesections
7127@end ifclear
7128
7129@node TI COFF
7130@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7131@cindex TI COFF versions
7132@kindex --format=@var{version}
7133The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7134TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7135also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7136format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7137header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7138
7139@ifclear GENERIC
7140@lowersections
7141@end ifclear
7142@end ifset
7143
2ca22b03
NC
7144@ifset WIN32
7145@ifclear GENERIC
7146@raisesections
7147@end ifclear
7148
7149@node WIN32
7150@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7151
c0065db7 7152This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 7153See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 7154command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7155
7156@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7157@cindex import libraries
7158@item import libraries
69da35b5 7159The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7160libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7161regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7162archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
7163support for creating such libraries provided with the
7164@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7165
c0065db7
RM
7166@item exporting DLL symbols
7167@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7168The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7169
7170@table @emph
7171@item using auto-export functionality
7172@cindex using auto-export functionality
7173By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7174which is controlled by the following command line options:
7175
0a5d968e
NC
7176@itemize
7177@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7178@item --exclude-symbols
7179@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7180@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7181@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7182@end itemize
7183
09e2aba4
DK
7184When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7185(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7186symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7187often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7188private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7189options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7190exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7191final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7192
7193If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7194command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7195if either of the following are true:
7196
7197@itemize
7198@item A DEF file is used.
7199@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7200@end itemize
dc8465bf 7201
c0065db7
RM
7202@item using a DEF file
7203@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7204Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7205an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7206exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7207name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7208command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7209
7210@example
7211gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7212@end example
7213
0a5d968e
NC
7214Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7215@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7216
dc8465bf
NC
7217Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7218
7219@example
4b5bd4e7 7220LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7221
7222EXPORTS
7223foo
7224bar
7225_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7226another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7227var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7228doo = foo == foo2
7229eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7230@end example
dc8465bf 7231
7fcab871 7232This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7233symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7234alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7235by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7236@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7237@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7238export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7239in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7240symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7241
6b31ad16
DS
7242The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7243name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7244the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7245
b45619c0
NC
7246When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7247library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7248@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7249executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7250
7251With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7252specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7253non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7254
7255If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7256or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7257filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7258
4b5bd4e7
DS
7259The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7260
7261@example
7262EXPORTS
7263 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7264 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7265 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7266@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7267
7268Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7269@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7270@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7271@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7272Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7273@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7274string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7275
7276The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7277
7278@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7279will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7280by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7281linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7282library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7283
7284@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7285The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7286the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7287@code{*_imp__foo}).
7288
7289@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7290well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7291read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7292variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7293the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7294extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7295application will behave unexpectedly.
7296
7297@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7298it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7299symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7300API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7301the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7302
4b5bd4e7
DS
7303See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7304other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7305
7306@cindex creating a DEF file
7307While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7308with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7309
7310@item Using decorations
7311@cindex Using decorations
7312Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7313itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7314declared as:
7315
7316@example
7317__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7318__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7319@end example
7320
7321All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7322any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7323this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7324the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7325
7326Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7327decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7328instead:
7329
7330@example
7331__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7332__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7333@end example
7334
c0065db7
RM
7335This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7336when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7337variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7338code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7339of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7340omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7341@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7342information.
c0065db7 7343@end table
dc8465bf 7344
2ca22b03
NC
7345@cindex automatic data imports
7346@item automatic data imports
7347The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7348by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7349compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7350issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7351code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7352c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7353initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7354decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7355platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7356command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7357The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7358suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7359trigger the feature's use.
7360
c0065db7 7361auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7362additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7363
c0065db7 7364"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7365documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7366
c0065db7
RM
7367The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7368occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7369One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7370below.
7371
7372@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7373For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7374object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7375offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7376field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7377in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7378without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7379The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7380references.
7381
c0065db7
RM
7382The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7383be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7384themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7385runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7386compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7387support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7388run without error on an older system.
7389
c0065db7
RM
7390@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7391enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7392
7393@cindex direct linking to a dll
7394@item direct linking to a dll
7395The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7396including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7397libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7398traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7399libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7400function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7401though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7402storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7403tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7404large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7405
c0065db7 7406Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7407@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7408of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7409perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7410select the dll instead of an import library.
7411
2ca22b03 7412
69da35b5
NC
7413For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7414to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7415
7416@example
45e948fe
NC
7417libxxx.dll.a
7418xxx.dll.a
7419libxxx.a
7420xxx.lib
69da35b5 7421cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7422libxxx.dll
7423xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7424@end example
7425
69da35b5
NC
7426before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7427
c0065db7
RM
7428(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7429where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7430@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7431file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7432@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7433
c0065db7
RM
7434Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7435@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7436was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7437various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7438could coexist on the same machine.
7439
2ca22b03
NC
7440The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7441applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7442libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7443
7444@example
7445bin/
7446 cygxxx.dll
7447lib/
7448 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7449 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7450@end example
7451
c0065db7
RM
7452Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7453done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7454
74551. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7456@example
7457gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7458@end example
2ca22b03 7459
69da35b5
NC
7460However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7461(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7462@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7463not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7464
2ca22b03
NC
74652. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7466directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7467should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7468making the app/dll.
7469
7470@example
7471ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7472@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7473
7474Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7475
7476@example
7477gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7478@end example
69da35b5
NC
7479
7480This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7481perfectly legal
7482
7483@example
7484bin/
7485 cygxxx-5.dll
7486lib/
c0065db7 7487 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
7488@end example
7489
dc8465bf 7490Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
7491even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7492@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7493
7494Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 7495wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
7496
74971. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7498work with auto-imported data.
7499
dc8465bf
NC
75002. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7501import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7502symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7503for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7504possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 7505
45e948fe
NC
75063. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7507critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7508in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7509stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7510
69da35b5 7511So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
7512true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7513a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7514binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
7515massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7516requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7517will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 7518
c0065db7 7519@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 7520@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7521@item adding additional names
7522Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
7523A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7524exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7525when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 7526import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 7527
c0065db7 7528@example
dc8465bf
NC
7529LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7530
7531EXPORTS
c0065db7 7532foo
dc8465bf 7533_foo = foo
c0065db7 7534@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7535
7536The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7537
7538Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7539source code using the "weak" attribute:
7540
c0065db7
RM
7541@example
7542void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7543void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7544@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7545
7546See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7547symbols.
7548
7549@item renaming symbols
7550Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 7551kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
7552@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7553DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7554created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7555
c0065db7 7556@example
dc8465bf
NC
7557LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7558
7559EXPORTS
7560_foo = foo
c0065db7 7561@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7562
7563The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7564@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7565@end table
dc8465bf 7566
0a5d968e 7567Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7568unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7569If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7570@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7571that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7572@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7573renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7574to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7575the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7576In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7577which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7578
7579@cindex weak externals
7580@item weak externals
7581The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7582weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7583defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7584are three variants of weak externals:
7585@itemize
7586@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7587called lazy externals.
7588@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7589This form is not presently implemented.
7590@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7591implemented.
7592@end itemize
7593As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7594are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7595uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7596
7597@cindex aligned common symbols
7598@item aligned common symbols
7599As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7600desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7601the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7602carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7603by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7604tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7605but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7606warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 7607
2ca22b03
NC
7608@end table
7609
7610@ifclear GENERIC
7611@lowersections
7612@end ifclear
7613@end ifset
7614
e0001a05
NC
7615@ifset XTENSA
7616@ifclear GENERIC
7617@raisesections
7618@end ifclear
7619
7620@node Xtensa
7621@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7622
7623@cindex Xtensa processors
7624The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7625@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7626specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7627keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7628example, with the command:
7629
7630@smallexample
7631SECTIONS
7632@{
7633 .text : @{
7634 *(.literal .text)
7635 @}
7636@}
7637@end smallexample
7638
7639@noindent
7640@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7641and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7642literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7643interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7644group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7645files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7646and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 7647
43cd72b9 7648@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 7649@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
7650Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7651provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7652is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7653literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7654will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7655location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7656the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7657unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7658@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7659range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7660
7661For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7662to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7663instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7664instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7665instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7666@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7667hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7668By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7669switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7670density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7671instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7672performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7673linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7674a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7675
7676The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7677control the linker:
7678
7679@cindex Xtensa options
7680@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
7681@item --size-opt
7682When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7683more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7684no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7685alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7686preserve the correctness of the code.
7687@end table
e0001a05
NC
7688
7689@ifclear GENERIC
7690@lowersections
7691@end ifclear
7692@end ifset
7693
252b5132
RH
7694@ifclear SingleFormat
7695@node BFD
7696@chapter BFD
7697
7698@cindex back end
7699@cindex object file management
7700@cindex object formats available
7701@kindex objdump -i
7702The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7703These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7704object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7705format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7706it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7707associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7708object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7709(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7710list all the formats available for your configuration.
7711
7712@cindex BFD requirements
7713@cindex requirements for BFD
7714As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7715several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7716BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7717formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7718been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7719BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7720may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7721
7722One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7723mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7724useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7725conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7726
7727@menu
7728* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7729@end menu
7730
7731@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7732@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7733@cindex opening object files
7734@include bfdsumm.texi
7735@end ifclear
7736
7737@node Reporting Bugs
7738@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7739@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7740@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7741
ff5dcc92 7742Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7743
7744Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7745it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7746to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7747work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7748@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7749
7750In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7751information that enables us to fix the bug.
7752
7753@menu
7754* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7755* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7756@end menu
7757
7758@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 7759@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
7760@cindex bug criteria
7761
7762If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7763
7764@itemize @bullet
7765@cindex fatal signal
7766@cindex linker crash
7767@cindex crash of linker
7768@item
7769If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 7770@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
7771
7772@cindex error on valid input
7773@item
ff5dcc92 7774If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
7775
7776@cindex invalid input
7777@item
ff5dcc92 7778If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
7779may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7780object files are correct.
7781
7782@item
7783If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 7784improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
7785@end itemize
7786
7787@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 7788@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 7789@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 7790@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
7791
7792A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 7793products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
7794recommend you contact that organization first.
7795
7796You can find contact information for many support companies and
7797individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7798distribution.
7799
ad22bfe8 7800@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 7801Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
7802@value{BUGURL}.
7803@end ifset
252b5132
RH
7804
7805The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7806@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7807fact or leave it out, state it!
7808
7809Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7810problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
7811assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7812matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7813the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7814location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7815were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7816into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7817specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 7818and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
7819
7820Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7821the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7822on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
7823
7824Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
7825bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7826respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7827You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
7828
7829To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7830
7831@itemize @bullet
7832@item
ff5dcc92 7833The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
7834the @samp{--version} argument.
7835
7836Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 7837the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7838
7839@item
ff5dcc92 7840Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
7841patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7842
7843@item
7844The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7845version number.
7846
7847@item
ff5dcc92 7848What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
7849``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7850
7851@item
7852The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7853observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7854list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7855sufficient.
7856
7857If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7858and then we might not encounter the bug.
7859
7860@item
7861A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
7862bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7863provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7864bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7865state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7866requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7867we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7868attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
7869
7870If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7871@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7872object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7873@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7874how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7875
7876@item
7877A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7878incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7879
ff5dcc92 7880Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
7881will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7882not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7883a chance to make a mistake.
7884
7885Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7886say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 7887copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
7888C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7889and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7890fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7891you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7892any conclusion from our observations.
7893
7894@item
ff5dcc92 7895If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
7896diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7897@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 7898If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
7899context, not by line number.
7900
7901The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7902sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7903@end itemize
7904
7905Here are some things that are not necessary:
7906
7907@itemize @bullet
7908@item
7909A description of the envelope of the bug.
7910
7911Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7912which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7913changes will not affect it.
7914
7915This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7916will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7917with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7918We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7919
7920Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7921of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7922output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7923less time, and so on.
7924
7925However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7926report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7927
7928@item
7929A patch for the bug.
7930
7931A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7932the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7933a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7934to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7935
ff5dcc92 7936Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
7937construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7938through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7939able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7940fixed.
7941
7942And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7943patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7944help us to understand.
7945
7946@item
7947A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7948
7949Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7950things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7951@end itemize
7952
7953@node MRI
7954@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7955@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
7956To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7957linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
7958alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7959described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7960simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 7961@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
7962linker commands; these commands are described here.
7963
7964In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7965file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7966features to make use of them.
7967
7968You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7969@samp{-c} command-line option.
7970
7971Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7972command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7973blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 7974MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7975issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7976
7977Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7978
7979You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7980lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7981The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7982
7983@table @code
7984@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7985@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7986@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7987Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
7988the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7989@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7990your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7991script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7992commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7993input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7994@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7995
7996@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7997@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7998Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7999in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8000
8001@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8002
8003@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8004@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8005Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8006@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8007
8008@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8009@item BASE @var{expression}
8010Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8011absolute addresses) in the output file.
8012
8013@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8014@item CHIP @var{expression}
8015@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8016This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8017
8018@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8019@item END
8020This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8021
8022@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8023@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8024Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 8025language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
8026
8027@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 8028@item
252b5132
RH
8029S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8030
8031@item
8032IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8033
8034@item
8035COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8036@samp{COFF}
8037@end enumerate
8038
8039@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8040@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8041Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8042@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8043
8044The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8045same line, with no change in its effect.
8046
8047@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8048@item LOAD @var{filename}
8049@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8050Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8051same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8052command line.
8053
8054@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8055@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8056@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8057MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8058option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8059
8060@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8061@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8062@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8063Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8064order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8065script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8066sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8067file, in the order specified.
8068
8069@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8070@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8071@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8072@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8073Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8074@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8075
8076@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8077@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8078@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8079@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8080You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8081specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8082If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8083@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8084@end table
8085
793c5807
NC
8086@node GNU Free Documentation License
8087@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8088@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8089
370b66a1
CD
8090@node LD Index
8091@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8092
8093@printindex cp
8094
8095@tex
7ca01ed9 8096% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8097% meantime:
8098\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8099\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8100\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8101\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8102\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8103\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8104\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8105\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8106\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8107% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8108@end tex
8109
252b5132 8110@bye
This page took 1.138462 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.